|
Citation |
- Permanent Link:
- http://digital.soas.ac.uk/LOAB000084/00001
Material Information
- Title:
- First lessons in Sanskrit grammar, together with an introduction to the HitopadesÌa
- Creator:
- Ballantyne, J. R ( James Robert ), 1813-1864
- Place of Publication:
- London
- Publisher:
- Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner
- Publication Date:
- 1908
- Language:
- English
Sanskrit
- Edition:
- 7th ed.
- Physical Description:
- viii, 109 p. : ; 22 cm.
Subjects
- Subjects / Keywords:
- Sanskrit language -- Grammar ( lcsh )
Fables, Indic ( lcsh ) संसà¥à¤•à¥ƒà¤¤ वà¥à¤¯à¤¾à¤•à¤°à¤£ संसà¥à¤•à¥ƒà¤¤ à¤à¤¾à¤·à¤¾ HitopadesÌa ( lcsh ) Hitopadesha
- Spatial Coverage:
- Asia -- India
à¤à¤¶à¤¿à¤¯à¤¾ -- à¤à¤¾à¤°à¤¤
- Coordinates:
- 21 x 78 ( India )
Notes
- Statement of Responsibility:
- by James R. Ballantyne ...
Record Information
- Source Institution:
- SOAS, University of London
- Rights Management:
- All applicable rights reserved by the source institution and holding location.
- Resource Identifier:
- KC415 ( soas classmark )
79015157 ( oclc )
|
Downloads |
This item has the following downloads:
|
Full Text |
<____
FIRST LESSONS
in
SANSKRIT GRAMMAR
together with
AN INTRODUCTION TO THE
HITOPADESA.
BY
JAMES R. BALLANTYNE, LL.D.
LIBRARIAN OF THE INDIA OFFICE.
SEVENTH EDITION.
LONDON:
KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & CO. LTD
DRYDEN HOUSE, GERRARD STREET, W.
1908.
The rights of translation and of reproduction are reserved.
ADVERTISEMENT TO THE SECOND EDITION.
The little brochure which, as above indicated, 1 prepared, some
eleven years ago, for the use of my English pupils in the Benares
College, has met with unexpected favour in England. At the instiga-
tion of teachers and publishers, I reprint it, with the addition of " An
Introduction to the Hitopadesa", the design of which Introduction is
stated at page 47 of the present volume. I make a present of the edition
to my worthy publisher, and I trust he will not suffer by accepting the
risk of its publication. With a view to diminishing that risk, it may lie
a-i well to anticipate a possible (or actual) question or two.
"Can a book of this kind,"—It may be asked,— "prepared for
Hindus, be a quite suitable book for learners in England?" I answer
—"Yes:—if suitable for the one class, it is suitable for the other."
The mere studc::U of English, in the Government Colleges in India,
have lost—as the bulk of English bovs are not now required to have—
the power (—so remarkable in Hindu children—) of learning by heart
long strings of woi;ds and long strings of rule<, not merely without
explanation—but—without repugnance. The Hindu student who has
devoted himself (—as so many now do—) to the nearly exclusive study
of English,—ami, on the other hand, the English youth, stand therefore
in much the same position as rega.-ds their entrance on the study of
Sanskrit.
" But are these ' First Lessons ' not intended to seduce the learner
into the study of the Kaumudi, and of the Paniraya grammatical
system generally?" I reply by quoting, from the above Advertise-
ment to the First Edition, my anticipation that he who should have gone
through this introduction would not " be so readily repelled by a gram-
mar which starts from the driest elements of the subject,—like the
grammar- of Professors Wilson and Williams".
" But are all the exercises in these ' First Lessons',—particularly ll.e
exercises for translation from English into Sanskrit,—of progressive
difficulty,—like those in the ' Sanskrit Manual' just published by tte
Boden Professor of Sanskrit?" I reply,—" Not so,—and intentionally
not s,j." The Advertisement to the First Edition shows, I think, with
sufficient plainness, that my design is to tempt the student to enter on
iv advertisement to the second edition.
the subject,—to lure him on to a Pisgah-prospect of the Land of Promise,
—and then to let him buckle manfully to the struggle if the prospect
tempt him. This is a much humbler aim than that of the Boden Pro-
fessor's " Sanskrit Manual"; but it is one which may, perhaps, not
unadvisably preccde it. How many persons, who would have been
repelled by Archbishop Whately's " Synthetical Compendium' of
Logic, have been conciliated to the study by his delightful " Analytical
Outline "! To the mere beginner it is not, in my opinion, advantageous
that each successive step should be a harder step, and more uphill,—
as Milo's bull-calf proved heavier every day he carried him. The sixth
Proposition of Euclid's "First Book" is a positively salutary relief
after the pains and perils of the " Pons Asinorum". A journey all
uphill is less pleasant than one with alternations of ascent, descent, an<7
occasional level; and further, it is not only less pleasant, but less profit-
able, to him whom the first hard climb provokes to turn back in
disgust.
In the preparation of ihe original brochure I was pleasantly aided by
my coadjutor in the then recently established Anglo-Sanskrit department
of the Benares College—Professor Fitz-Edward Hall, D.CL., Oxon.^
who, being amused by the plan of the work, took a lively interest in its
preparation. If this extended edition had undergone his critical revision,
I should feel more confidence in its faulilessness ;—but, such as it is,
Dr Hall will not, I hope, disdain this dedication of it to him, as a
memento of our joint labours, in happy bygone years, at Benares.
J. R. B.
ADVERTISEMENT TO THE FIRST EDITION.
The opinion has been adopted by the Government of the N. W.
Provinces that the study of Sanskrit, by the English pupils in the
Government Colleges, might be made to furnish a means of mental
discipline analogous to that which the study of the Latin and the Greek
furnishes in Europe.
In these " First Lessons", the plan of which was suggested by Mr.
T. K. Arnold's " First Latin Book ", and which are intended to precede
the study of any regular Sanskrit grammar, the etymological rules for
the permutation of letters in the formation of words, which in the
regular grammars the learner encounters at the outset, are remitted to a
later division of the work,—attention being called at the outset to. those
syntactical rules only—and to each rule only when a special occasion
for it arises—which are of constant application in modifying the appear-
ance of perfect words when they come together in a sentence.
Attention is also confined, in the first instance, to those forms, (such
as the 3d person singular of the verb) in which the most constantly
recurring words present themselves in sentences, and the pupil is set at
once to write exercises, in which a number of useful words are repeated
so frequently as to render unlikely their being readily forgotten again.
The pupil, whilst making progress, will here probably have the pleasant
feeling that he is making progress :—and, after mastering this intro-
duction, he will not be so readily repelled by a grammar which starts
from the driest elements of the subject,—like the grammars of Professors
Wilson and Williams, or the Laghu Kaumudi, with its English Version.
If it should be thought that too little demand is here made upon the
learner for the exertion of mental effort—the reply is this, that the main
purpose of these exercises is not so much to provoke mental effort as
to imprint on the memory of the learner some of the broadest outlines of
a subject which, first presented in all its details, is apt to prove re-
pulsively bewildering.
J. R. B
INDEX.
PART I.
page
The Dcvanay&ri Alphabet , 1
The crude form of the Noun . !3
The Nominative case . . 3
The root of the Verb . . 6
The 3d person singular present 6
Roots of the 1st conjugation ...... 0
The improper diphthongs, or
Euphonic changes ... ... 7
The 3d person singular 2d future 9
The Aecusative singular . 10
Changes of Anuswdra 11
The Nominative plural . 13
The Accusative plural . 14
The Instrumental case ... 15
The Indefinite past participle passive 15
The 2d Preterite............17
The Indeclinable, or Conjunctive, past participle 19
Indeclinable words ...... 20
The Dative and Ablative cases . 21
The Genitive and Locative cases . . 22
Adjectives and Karmadharaya compounds . . 23
Euphonic changes of the vowels ..... 24
Tat/iurvsha compounds . 25
Pronouns ... 26
The conjunction iti . 28
The Passive voice . . 29
The Second conjugation . 30
The treatment of Visarga . 31
The Third conjugation ... 31
The Fourth and remaining conjugations . . 32
Dwandwa compounds ... .34
The dual number........... . 35
Bahuvrilii and Tatpurusha compounds . . 35
Euphonic changes of consonants . 36
Case-endings of the noun . 37
Tense-endings of the verbs 39
Duals of the pronouns 40
viii index.
i'age
The Infinitive . 41
The present participle . . 42
The indefinite past participle active 42
The future participles passive 43
Prepositions .... . 44
The imperative passive . . 45
The potential . . ±5
PART II
Introduction to the Uitopadesa .... . 47
How to make use of the interspersed Exercises . 48
CHAPTER I.
The story of the Crow, the Tortoise, the Deer, and the Mouse 48
The old Tiger and the Traveller............49
The Huntsman, the Deer, the Boar, and the Jackal 51
The Jackal and the Elephant .... .53
CHAPTER II.
The story of the Bull, the two Jackals, and the Lion 58
The Thief, the Ass, and the Dog ... 60
The Lion, the Mouse, and the Cat 02
The Old Woman and the Bell ... . 63
The Crow, the Golden-chain, and the Black Serpent 65
The Lion and the Rabbit ... 67
CHAPTER III.
The Birds and the Monkeys , 70
The Blue Jackal ... .71
The Barber who killed a Beggar . -* .73
CHAPTER IV
The Brahman who broke the Pots and Pans 75
The Brahman and his Weasel 76
Abbreviations used in the Vocabulary ..... 77
Analytical Vocabulary (Sanskrit and English) of the words that
occur in the Extracts from the Hitopadesa . . 79
Suggestions in regard to an Elementary Course of Sanskrit
Reading •
103
INTRODUCTION.
THE DEVANAGARI ALPHABET.
VOWELS, &C.
^T a, ^CJ «', i, ^ i, ^ u, "51 u, i-'. C? l>j, hi. I
■N » —"
TT e, TJ ai, ^TT au< (anuswdm) ii, (vimrga) h.
consonants. ' f
Gutturals ^ kha, XJ gha, na.
Palatals xf ch a, ^ cliha, ^r ja- •f V^ ilia, na-
Cerebrals. 1 to- tka, ! 5 da,
Dentals. cf ta. TZJ t.ha | i da, dha, na.
Labials. Tf pa. ! Tfi pha, of ba, ^f bha, ma.
Semi-vowels. •q ya, ^ ra, ^ la, cf ra, or wa.
Sibilants and ) Aspirate S ^ sa' sha, \ ^ sa< ha.
The vowels in the foregoing schenie, as throughout the follow-
ing pages, must be pronounced as follows: viz. a as in Roman;
a as in father; i as in it; i as in police; u as in push; u as in
rude; e as in there; ai as in aisle; o as in so; au as ow in now.
The consonants are, in general, pronounced as in English. But
th and ph must be sounded as in the words anthill and uphill, not
as in this and philology.
The above forms of the vowels are used only at the beginning
of a syllable. ' The vowel ^ a is inherent in every consonant,
and is sounded after every one which has not the mark of a pause
thus—(viz. n) subscribed, nor another vowel, in a contracted
shape, attached to it These other vowels, when not at the begin-
ning of a syllable, assume the following contracted shapes.
A
at.
2 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
MEDIAL AND FINAL FOR5IS JpF THE VOAY'ELS.
T a, "P?,^ i, u, it, rij ri, Iri, nrf lp\ e,
11 1 .9 CN i. _/e. ______«£,___
o, T
Examples of ihe Vowels following the letter eR k.
cR ha, eRT hd, "fa hi, eft ki, efi hi. hi, ^ kri,[ cR kfi,
^ klri, klri, cR ke, % hai ho, cRT kau, eR kail,
or ham, cRt hah. The vowels u and u are added to the letter
^ r thus—ru, ^ ru.
When two or more consonants meet, without the intervention
of a vowel, they coalesce and become one conjunct character.
These compounds are formed by writing the subsequent conso-
nant under the first, by blending them in a particular way, or by
writing them in their usual order, omitting the perpendicular
stroke of each letter except the last.
The letter ^ r, when it immediately precedes a consonant,
is written above it, in the form of" a crescent, thus, TJ rga\ when
it immediately follows one, it is written as a slanting line be-
neath it thus, hrci, TJ gra.
The following are among the most frequently recurring of the
conjunct consonants.
Ida, ^J hwa, ^JJ ktwa, ^f kaha, kshya, kshiva
â– ^SJJ khya, gra, tjof gnja, 'Jf ghna, ^ nka, ^ nga,
"^f chcha, chchha,'^ jja, sT jria* jya, jra,
a^J ncha, TJ5 nta, ita, (pf tna, ^ tra, trya,
twa, ^ clda, ^ dclha, ^ dbha, dbhya, c£f dya,
^ dra, ^ dlaca, t^T ntHa< nlra, ^f pta, V?f bhya,
scha, ^ sra, ^ swa, ^f shta, TSf shy a, ^ sta, ^ stra,
JST stha, ^Zf sya, ^ lma, Ima, ^ hma, hya, j? h a, o
* Commonly pronounced gyu.
LESSON XXII t.
3
Lesson 1.
1.—A Sanskrit noun, as it stands in the dictionary, is said to be
in the crude form.
2.—Nouns, in the crude form, end either in a vowel or in a con-
sonant.
3.—The vowels with which most nouns end are tJJ' a, ^ff a,
^ i, ^ i, ^ u, and ri.
4. Nouns are Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter. Names of
males are masculine, and those of females feminine; but many
words are masculine or feminine, which are names neither of
males nor of females. For example, ^SJ ratha, ' a ear,' is
masculine ; and frjtlT chinta, ' reflection,1 is feminine. Those
that end in a or I are generally feminine.
5.—By adding to, or otherwise changing, the crude form of the
noun, seven different forms, with different senses, are obtained.
These altered forms are called cases.
6.—The 1st case is that in which a noun appears when it de-
notes the subject spoken of in the sentence. This case is called
the Subjective, or, more commonly, the Nominative case.
7.—Words which, in the crude form, end in the vowels set down
in No. 3, commonly make the Nominative by altering the termi-
nations thus:—
^Cf a becomes, in the Nominative, ^JI ah. ; - r . '
^fj o> remains unaltered.
^ i becomes,-in the Nominative, ih.
^ 2 t; ih.
^ u uh.
ri .... ^n'a.
N. B.—Neuter nouns ending in a make the Nominative in
_•
am.
Exercise 1.
8.—Write down the Nominative case of each of the following
words both in Devanagari and English characters.
12 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
aswa, a horse.
St5$J ichchhd, wish.
^ 1dsana (n.*), a seat.
of^TJJJ viva, a lute.
buddhi, understanding.
TJ^ guru, a preceptor.
^("fXrT agni, fire.
^JTefi kaka, a crow.
ITTccTT mala, a garland.
TSft sri, prosperity.
* \ ii| gvna, a quality.
flf^T jritri^afathev.
cfTf^ vachana (n.), speech.
chandra, the moon,
^of dcva, a god.
"PT5TT puja, worship.
griha (n.), a house.
r
^TTT dharmma, merit.
vana (n.), a wood.
^J^^otev^niother.
^^cT parvvata, a mountain
TTCZf madhya, the midst.
hihsa, injury.
TJ^ patra (n ), a leaf.
Vocabulary 1.
^f^1 pati, a master.
dhdtri, a creator.
J pantha, a traveller.
^qE\ jala (n.), water.
TJ^tJ phala (n.l, fruit.
TJefTJI ravana, Ravana.
cf^ vriksha, a tree.
ts -----
cfcjj baka, a crane.
dukha (n ), pain.
TJT'iJ satru, an enemy.
/
^THT sabhd, an assembly.
karttri, a doer.
_t,
sishya, a disciple.
'SJTf^Ff srigdla, a jackall.
efi^Ff kula (n.), a family.
duhitri, a daughter.
samudra, the occari.
Tp^Cfi pustaka (n.), a book.
c(|r(|T kanyd, a girl,
oq | y vydghra, a tiger.
ddfri, a giver.
A-
^ hasta, the hand.
â– JQT^ rama, Rama.
VI idstra (n.), a scripture.
* The letter ' n' indicates that, the word is Neuter.
LESSON XXII t. 13
®TF^H
rffa ti'a ("•)' a s'lore> or bank, wf^f Lhumi, the ground.
Cv
^f^ narct, a man, or male cpfq kapi, a monkey.
manmliya, a man.
IJ^ putra, a son.
---------
dhana (11.), wealth.
TfTJ mriga, a deer.
anna (n.), food,
^f^ hari, Vishnu,
sf^y krodha, anger.
xj sfi chakra (n.), a wheel
l^fcf) mastaka (n.), the head
IJW jjrabku, lord.
^jffR sakti, power.
sarpa, a snake.
^^ hula (n.), a sacrifice. ^
M
efifV kavi, a poet.
TfTTT grama, n village.
f^TT kriya, action.
â– ^f^T ruchi, relish.
pataka (n.), sin. ,
vidyd, knowledge.
Trfl^clj' mushika, a mouse.
^flT chaura, a thief.
"^f^T bala, a boy.
malika, a gardener.
T^n^TT drama, a garden.
tard, a star.
Lesson 2.
9.—Some final consonants, in the formation of the Nominative
case, are changed thus:—
xT c/i or TJT s becomes eR k. A final ^ w is dropped, and
\ \ \ N
the preceding vowel (ifjtlie word is ijOtjeAitoc) is lengthened.
^ r is changed to visarga, and the vowel is lengthened.
10.—An aspirated letter (e. g. IjJ kha) is changed to the cor-
responding unaspirated letter {e.g. e(} ha).
11.—Some final consonants undergo no change.
6
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
Exercise 2.
12. —Write down the Nominative case of each of the following
words in Devanagari and English characters.
Vocabulary 2.
elf^ vach, a word. "RJ^T dis, a side, direction.
rajan, a king. dtman, soul.
hastin, an elephant, f^f^f^ vidyut, lightning.
jTJ^ gir, a word. namon (n.), a name.
â– jfTTrf jagat, the world. f^^f^TT^ chilralilch, a
^ ^ painter.
Lesson 3.
13.—A Sanskrit verb, as it stands in the dictionary, appears in
the form called the root.
14.—To make the 3d person singular of the present tense, the
syllable f^J ti is subjoined to the root. Thus, for example, from
the root as, to be,1 is formed ^ffiS" asti ' is-'
15.— When such a termination as ti (No. 14.) is subjoined, the
root generally requires to undergo some change. According to
the nature of this change, roots are divided into classes or conju-
gations, of which there are reckoned ten.
/
16.—Roots of the 1st conjugationjnterpose the short vowel 5ST a
between the final and such a termination as ti (No. 14.), and
they change a final simple vowel in the root, (or a short vowel
when a single consonant follows,) into its corresponding improper
diphthong.
17.—The improper diphthongs, or guna substitutes for the vowels,
are the following: —
Of ^ i or f^ i the guna substitute is )T e,
— u or u — — o.
— ^J ri or ft — — nr.
]8.—The improper diphthong XT e is changed to sgfZf ay, and
^ft o to ^cf av, when a vowel follows. V
LESSON XXII t. 15
Exercise 3.
19.—Write down the 3d person singular present tense of each
of the following verbs of the 1st conjugation, both in Devanagari
and English letters, with the meaning in English.
W bhu, to become.
c\
at, to rove,
â– ay ^ arh, to be fit.
"RjJ kshi, to decay.
char, to go, or get
v along- \
T5f ji, to conquer.
^ tri, to cross over.
—!_—-
Vocabulary 3.
VJI tJ such, to sorrow for.
sri, to serve.
S?X t0
^Ttf srip, to creep.
^TT smri, to remember.
has, to laugh.
^ hri, to take.
t.yaj, to abandon.
t^J dah, to burn.
<1 dru, to ooze.
XT^ pacli, to cook.
vad, to speak.
cf^T vas, to dwell.
^ cf^ vah, to carry.
IjJ^ khan, to dig.
Tf^ pat, to fall.
Tf^rf phal, to bear fruit.
N
budh, to know.
o \
'craj, to go.
^H**! jalp, to prate.
"^"^Ff dial, to move.
bhrarn, to wander.
jx-
Example. The root of W bhu, by No/1(5,. becomes OT ?
c\
and the vowel ^ a is to be interposed between this and the ter-
mination f^" ti (No. 14)—so that we have bho + a + ti;—and
then, the o being changed to av by No. 18—we have cjffT bha-
vati, ' he becomes.'
Lesson 4.
20.—When one Sanskrit word immediately follows another,
8 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
some change often takes place in the two letters thus brought
together.
21.— If the former of two words placed next to each other ends
Cf'ty alU' t'ie ot'ler bt'gins with a soft * consonant, the ^fi ^
ah is changed to ^^ o- For example, when ^ofl devaJi, the
nominative singular ^No. 8.) of ^cf deva, 'a god,' is placed be-
fore cfcjf^T vadati, the 3d person singular present tense (No. 19)
of vad, ' to speak '—the two are written thus—
devo vadati, ' the god speaks.1
See further under Nos. 94 and 95.
Exercise 4.
22.—Write the following phrases in Sanskrit, both in Devana-
gari and English letters, taking the words from Vocabularies 1
and 3, and paying attention to the rule—No. 21.
The crane wanders. The Brahman cooks. The god laughs.
The jackal dwells. The quality becomes. The horse carries.
The traveller knows. The tree falls. The man prates. The
leaf decays. The daughter abandons. The father crosses over.
Th.e mouse digs. The water oozes. The mother speaks. The
girl serves. The boy is fit.
23.—Write down the meaning, in English, of the following
phrases:— --
TTRt I *rrf?T I TTWr snrfcT I
W Wfrf I ^ST* l â– q^frf I TT-
*ffcT I ^ ^^rfrT I WT^TTOt I TTJTt ^flfa I
m^t SRqfa I TfTcfT ^fcT I
Lesson 5.
24.—If the former of two words placed next to each other enda
* The soft consonants are <•/«, gha; jajhu; da, dha; da, dha; ha, bha; the
uasals, the semi-vowels, and ha.
LESSON XXII t. 9
in visan^a^ and the other begins witli anyconsonant fex^
cept a guttural, a labial, or a sibilant—before which the termina-
tion mky remain unchanged—) the, visarqa is changed to a sibilant.
For example, when the word tarati comes after the word
sCIUniJ! brdhmanah, the two are written thus—I tM ({T^frT
brdhmanas-tarati, 'the Brahman crosses over.' |
25.—A sibilantt must be of the same class as the consonant
with which it coalesces,—that is to say, ^(T s is the sibilant when
a palatal, such as xj cha, follows ; and "EJ sh when a cerebral,
such as £ ta follows.
Exercise 5.
26.—Write down, in Sanskrit, the following phrases, taking the
words from Vocabularies 1 and 3.
The devotee crosses over. The tree decays. The Brahman .
abandons. The jackal creeps. The son remembers.
27.—Write down the meaning, in English, of the following
phrases:—
*fT: prefer i ^TSPgrfrT i UH: wfa I
T^irT I TTcTfrT I TT^nn^'srfcT I TTP^TfcT I
^snrfrT i ^ifa i
' ^ Lesson 6.
28.—The ad person singular 2d future ends in ^Zff^f syati
or ^[f^f ishyati. Thus the verb bloc, which makes i^off^f
in the present, makes in the future i^f^fUjf^ bhavishyati, ' he
will become.'
Exercise 6.
29.—Write the following phrases in Sanskrit:—
The horse will fall. The Brahman will speak. The son will
* The hard consonants are ha, kha; cha, chha • ta, tha; ta, tha; pa, pha
and the sibilants.
t T5T is the palatal sibilant, "EJ the cerebral, and ^ the dental.
10 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
wander. ^The tree will bear fruit. The man will remember.
The jackal will take. The Brahman will know. Rama will
laufh. The horse will g-o. RavanaTwiTl cross over, Rama will
n o — . _ -
conquer.
30.—When the future is formed by ^jf^f syati (No. 28)
some change often takes place in the final of the verb. The fol-
lowing list may be committed to memory :—
^TOfrT tyakshyati, ' he will abandon.'
WfrT dhakshyati, 'lie will burn.1
ft^fcT droshyati, ' it will ooze.'
pakshyati, ' he will cook.'
^Nfd jeshyali, 4 he will conquer.'
vatsyati, ' he will dwell.'
(
Exercise 7
31.—Write down, in English, the meaning of the
phrases:—
ffafa I W ^frT I ^n^ft I HfT
â– anwfcT I ^TT^^rfrr I ^T^wr ijfOTfh I
^fft^f^T I ffl^rfcT I fjcTT I
Lesson 7.
32.—The 2d case is that in which a noun appears when it is
the object of a transitive verb. This case is called the Objective,
or, more commonly, the Accusative, case.
33.—A transitive verb is one which gives no complete meaning,
till some person or thing is mentioned, as the object to whom or to
which the action was done.
Rama killed—(killed whom ?) Ravana.
LESSON XXII t. 11
34.—The following are the accusative sin^ular endings of nouns
that, in the crude form, end in a vowel:—
♦
a becomes ^ am.
X
%
^ i --^ im.
u --^ um.
TfJ ri—(in some words) ^ffaram, (in others) ^TTT ('"'am
—The anuswara, when followed by a vowel, takes the form
of T^ rn. When followed by a consonant of the five classes, the
guttural, &c., it optionally takes the form as well as the sound of
the nasal belonging to the same class. Otherwise it remains un-
changed. Thus -gf^rf^T annam vahati, ' he carries the
food '—xfffT annam pachati, ' he cooks the food '—
annan tyajati, ' he abandons the food.1
Observe that the accusative is generally placed before the verb,
as in the examples just given.
Exercise 8. ,,
â– V
36.—Write down, in English, the meaning of the following
phrases :—
m: i ^^rfcT i
^T^TTU: i n^r ^rrvfrT i ^m^nrfrr nw I
^ ^fa I TTTcrt ^^fcT \ ^fi
wfarfa ^T^ttt: I
Exercise 9.
37.—Put into Sanskrit the following phrases :—
The father knows (his) son. The Brahman will remember the
12
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
scripture. Rama will abandon the house. The car carries the
man. The son will cook the food. The devotee will know the
god. The crane will cross the water. The mouse will dig the
ground. The son will serve the father.
Lesson 8.
38.—Some useful verbs of the 1st conjugation form the preseut
and some of the other tenses irregularly. The following roots,
with their 3d person singular present, may be committed to
memory :—
"^TT kram makes sJJTTTf^T kramati ' he walks.'
yam —
37t7 gup —â–
ghra
-
^J du —
dri's -
s ______
TIT pa — fcjoffrf pibati, ' he drinks.'
^ | shtha —■f^fcT tiahthati, ' he stands.1
sru — ^TTntfrr srinoti, ' he hears/
39.—When the 3d person singular ends in ati, the 3d
person plural ends in ^ (r^j anli. Thus ^off^cT bhavanti,
' they become.'
40.—The negative is na> 'not > l,s *T®rfcT na bhavati,
'lie does not become;' ^ na bhavanti, 'they do not
become.'
41.—Interrogatives are f^fiT? kirn, ' what ?' — cfi^ kutra,
------—---'------\ vf)
' where ?' - kada, ' when ?' — cfifTI kutah, ' whence ?' —
n-^fh gachchhati, ' he goes.'
Tftm^ gopdyati, ' he protects.'
f^njf^T jighrati, 'he smells.'
iftcjf^' jivati, ' he lives.'
â– JT^^ffT yachchhati, ' he gives.'
XreUT^' pa'syati, ' he sees.'
LESSON XXII t. 13
f^lH^TT kim-artham, 'why?' — ^TOTf katham, 'how?1 &c.
Examples : fejj kim vadati, ' what does he say ?' cff^
c^fa kuira vasati, ' where does he dwell ?' f^fiTT^fllffT-
T'W^t ^TTf^T kimartham pitaram putro na smarati, ' why
does the son not remember the father ?'
42.—Verbs signifying 'togo to' require the accusative of the
place gone to.
Ex. cfiT'sfr M kdsiii gachchhati, ' he goes
to Kasi (Benares).'
Exercise 10.
43.—The son smells the flower. They go to Kasi. The crow
does not see the jackal. Rama walks to the mountain. Why
does not the father protect the son ? The Brahman drinks water.
He gives the food. The Brahman remembers the scripture.
Lesson 9.
44.—The Nominative^plural is frequently formed by changing
the termination as follows :—
â– UT a (masculine) or ^J d (mas. or fem ) becomes ^TJ! ah.
a (neuter) — — ^JTTf^T &ni.
^ i (mas. or fem.) — — ^SHTt ayah.
tg* v — — — ^Tof: avah.
ri --- SJT^J arah or ^"f^.* drah.
45.—When a soft consonant, or a vowel, comes after ^JJ dh.
the visarga is dropped. Ex. nardh, ' men ':—of^fjxl
nara vasanti, ' men dwell—^^T ^T^f^T nard arhanti, ' the
men are fit.'
Exercise 11.
46. —The mice creep. The thieves take the food. The men
laugh. The Brahmans will prate. The jackals drink water.
H
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.
When will the sons cook the food ? The fathers do not see the
flower. The men go to the shore. The Brahmans will not cross
the sea. The flowers fall. What do the men say ?
— fcfiTTO HTT H ^fer i ^rr: trf^rf^T i ^ w:
wf^f i "Rrar i^fcr i jgjj ?ftt n^fa i
^rf^ i
Lesson 10.
47.—The Accusative plural masculinejis formed by changing
the termination, as follows :—
a becomes an. ^ « becomes ^^ in.
TJ u — un. ri — fin.
Ex. c^'T'? dcvan smarati, ' he remembers the gods':—
XT^^ffT satrun paxyati, ' he sees the enemies.'
C"- \
Obs. A neater vvord is always the same in the accusative as
. in thejiominatjmj—thus, (No. 44) XfOCfrf^J' TJTJjf^f pushpdni
pasyati, 1 he sees the flowers.'
Cf> Ac JL( —a consonant or a vowel follows, then, ih
[p-i) becomes ^^ ir; and, in jike_manner, ih becomes ^ ?> .
V] â– & v.h becomes ^^ ur ; JX: eh becomes,^ er â– aih be-
■(, /Vi).«/ comes ^ air; ^jff: 0h becomes or; and auh
becomes ^f^ aur. Ex. cfif^^f
kavir vadati, ' the poet
says.1
Exercise 12.
49.—The crows see the jackals. The jackals do not see the
crows. Rama sees (his) enemies. The sons protect (their)
fathers. Why do the sons not protect (their) fathers? Rama
protects the monkeys. The fathers sorrow for (their) sons. The
LESSON XXII t.
15
Brahmans remember the scriptures. The boy smells the flowers.
When do the men go to the villages?
Tffxnf^wf^T XI^T: I Heifer "SJTO I W^T^T
vO sD c >
^ TT^f^r ^RFfiT: I W^T I TJf
m^w- i ^f^jre^Jnggr i
*T^frT I ^ wfcr fq^: I cfH ^fa^fo
^RT: I ^T^R ir^Tffr i ST^T t^rfcT i
c\ n vd c\ \ %
wn I
Lesson 11.
50.—The singular of the 3d, or Instrumental, case, is frequently
formed by changing the termination as follows :—
^J a becomes TT^1 ena. ^ i becomes ^HT
"^T u ■— uncL ^J ri — rd.
-n ~ kjAjlti
s Ex. ^TrT hastena harita, ' he takes with the hand1:— t-
^jfT^^J agnina dahati, ' he burns with fire.1
Exercise 13.
51.—The men cook the food with fire. The Brahman burns
the sacrifice with fire. The son, with his hand, carries the flower.
Ravana, with- anger, sees the enemies. When does Ravana see
the enemies with anger? When will the man take the flower
with his hand? How will the d^er cross over the water? The $
son, by wealth, protects (his) father. Men live by food.
Lesson 12.
52.—The indefinite past -participle p'assive generally ends in
(f ta, and, like an adjective in a, takes the three genders,
thus:—
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
Sing. nom. ^fj tah. ^T td. cTT tom.
16 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.
53.—The following list of past participles may be committed to
memory:—
smrita, ' remembered.1
ukta, 'said, or spoken.
tyakta. ' abandoned.'
fcT lirita, ' taken.1
ftfcT jita, ' conquered.'
*T
datta, ' given.1
drishta, ' seen.1
^facT patita. ' fallen.1
xftrT pita. ' drunk.1
yata, ' restrained.1
STTcT jata, ' born, produced."
C\ bhiita, ' been.'
iruta, ' heard.'
Exercise 14.
54.—Translate the following phrases :—
C x ^
frW I TTWT TT^TtT f^: | ^ Ufj-R TR: \
cfi^T fw T l I W sn^TC!^
TftcTTT i fsTcT: I
The son, abandoned by his father, goes to the village. Ravana,
conquered by Rama, will fall. The jackal, seen by the man, will
abandon the village. The sons, abandoned by the father, will
wander. The crow, seen by the jackal, drinks water.
4
LESSON XXII t. 17
Lesson 13.
55.—The^2d^gretOTte is distinguished by the reduplication of
the root. The termination of the 3d person singular is 5JJ a;
but if the root ends in ^JJ «, the termination is ^f au-
56.—In the reduplication of the root, a guttural is changed to a
palatal—e. g. of} k or kh is changed to ch ; and TJ ga to ^f jet.
57.—Other changes—many of them relating to single verbs—
occur in the formation of this tense.. At present the following
examples may be committed to memory:—
bhu makes c^cf babliuya, he became.
Cs cv ---
37TT gam — ^ITT^ jagama, lie went.
char — ^^"R chachctra, he went.
' f^f ji — ftlTPI jigctya, he conquered.
^ tri — (T^IT tatdra, he crossed over.
«6
tyaj — Cl<^T5f tatydja, he abandoned.
dd — dadau, he gave.
dah — daddha, he burned.
dris — dadarsa, lie saw.
dru — dudrdva, it oozed.
^ XJJ pd —1 T^m papau, he drank.
TJtT pach — XJXJJ^1 papdcha, he cooked.
TTcT pat — "CTRTrT papdta, he fell.
"^IJ budh — bubodha, he knew.
-3 \ O
bhram— "SfJJffTI babhrdma, he wandered,
cf^ vad — ^JcfTy uvdda, lie spoke,
ej^ vas — ^cfRT uvasa, he dwelt.
18 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
vah makes ucdha, lie carried.
fa such sri — fwr^r susocha, he sorrowed for. sisrdya, he served.
-9 sru susrdva, he heard.
sri — TOTR sasara, he went.
srip — wt sasarpa, he crept.
smri — STOTT sasrhdra, he remembered.
5L sru — mrs susrdva, it dropped.
is has — STfW jahdsa, lie laughed.
i hri - jahdra, he took.
Exercise 15.
58.—Translate the following phrases:—
ttto frr-r tm: i (ttitt; sfffa: i tjw-
3TT5T "facR^T I tt f^W^ ^ I H^q
N
^kt: wct i wi^t: ^^tv i ^r wi i
fcrrTT I 3TOT ^TT^JW I ^ I
nD ^ vD
TO W I WTt ^R ^HI I
The horse fell. The man did not cross the ocean. The Brah-
man remembered the scripture. The father, abandoned by the
son, wandered. > The jackal went to the shore. "When did the
boy laugh ? He gave the food. The Brahman heard the scrip-
ture. The girl served (her) mother. The fruit, taken by the
hand, fell. The thief, seen by the man, crossed over the water.
With anger, the enemy burnt the house.
Lesson 14.
59.—When an action succeeds another—as when "Rama con-
LESSOX XIV.
19
quered Ravana, and went to his lionne"—-the former action is
commonly expressed by a participle called the conjunctive, which
implies the having done so and so.
60.—The conjunctive participle (—in uncompounded verbs—)
ends in j^J two. Ex f^T ^nTH rdmo,
if
rdvanan jitwd, grihan jagdma. ' Rama, having conquered Ravana
went to his house (or home).'
61.—The following list of conjunctive participles may be com-
mitted to memory:
Cx bhutwa having become.
tyakwd having abandoned. ©
dattwd having given.
fnTT hritwd having taken
'piiuod having drunk.
w smritwd having remembered
3wr gained having gone.
SfT drishtwd having seen.
WT srutwa having heard.
f^Tr^T sthitwd having stood.
Exercise 16.
62.—Translate the following phrases :—
The Brahman, having gone to the shore, drinks water. The
son, having abandoned the father, will wander. The men, having
seen the tree, will go to the village. The jackal, having drunk
water, went to the shore. The son, having remembered the
father, spoke.
TT^: -fasu it STfiT ijmfh i wrercr: srrca
n® C
cftt TlrTT W 1 ^ ^t SfT ^TT 1
20
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
to "srfTO i srrenjft ^ nfa-
^TfrT I
Lesson 15.
63.—The following indeclinable words, including those given
in Nos. 40 and 41, may be committed to memory.
Vocabulary 4.
OTOT^- ^i;:neX- 3RPTT anykhd, otherwise.
cdra, here. ^l^ffa? idun'm, now.
adya, to-day. I_______iha, here.
_â– , , ttsst ekadd, at one time, on
^RPT -anyatra, elsewhere. ^^T one occasion^__
S, ^f^J ili, so, thus. TJ"^ eva, also, only.
__ . awn katham, how? in what
gal iva, like, as, so. -j
...» \ mariner i
TTSfff-ekatm, in one place!/ 3iFTfV?T kad"chit> some-
------------------ ^ ^ times.
7 ekadhd, in one way.1 i fsfjT^f kintu, but.
evam, thus, in this , , , , c
^^ manner. fcT- kuiah< whence?
T^ll-T dwidhd, in two ways. / efi^f^^f kutrachit, any where.
--------N
cfJ^T kadd, when ? ' . tatra, tliefc. ^
fojjo^j kincha, moreover. \ tadd, then.
fajH Mm, what? TTOTf? iathA,li' f?r thus' for
^ ^ v ^ " example.
cf}^ .Intra, where ? ^ na, not.
s
cTcT' tatah, thence, after that. If"RT« prdyah, mostly.
atcih, hence. ' ^ 'JJ^J yadd, when.
__ __^_
atlia-, so, thus, well then. - .sarvatra, everywhere.
| adliuna. now. H^TT tathd, thus, so.
LESSON XXII t.
21
^"[^(T tuvat, so far, so much. TJTipf yathd, as.
â– q^TrT pa'scMt, afterwards. ^T^Tf samipe, near to.
â– s ^
T^XZf madhye, in the midst of. . ^of^T sarvada, always.
asai"' f5 * ,er"y'because'
64.—It may be observed, from the foregoing list, that the inler-
rogatives begin with k, and the relatives with y. The termina-
tion of time is da—as in ^HJ tada, 'then;' that of place is tra—
--------—--f ( ' "
as in ^^f tatra, ' there.'
Lesson 16.
65.—The 4th, or Dative, case, and the 5th, or Ablative, case...
of many words may be formed by the following substitutions.
Sing. Plural.
For final Dat. ^TflJ dya T7VZfJ ebhyah.
>r final
^f a )
^f a ) Abl. ^TTcT TTW^t ebhyah.
N
For final ^ Dat. aye ibhyak.
^ i j Abl. TT: eh ^Wj: ibhyak
Ex. ^TIT^T rdmdya, ' to Rama ^T^CHTcT rdvanat, ' from
RavanatT^H"! narebhyah, ' to or from the men^^
haraye, 'to Hari ;' kaveh, 'from the poet;' ^f^WJJ
kavibhyah, 'to or from the poets.1
Exercise 17.
66. — The father gave the book to the son. The girl goes from
the house. Unexpectedly a flower fell from the tree. He gave
wealth to the Brahmans. Ravana, from anger, will not speak.
He took water from the ocean. Then the king gave wealth to
the poets. The arrow will fall again.
^TOTcT TTWfcTrT WcT I facTT ^
30 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
l^f ^It I rfcTT ir^rr sn^rcjTO i
Tfm ^TJfTrf nflfe S^T "facTT WR I ^
f^frT ^H^TrT I HTfft f^c^T ^R^TcT ^TfTT I
Lesson 17.
67.—The 6th, or Genitive, case, and the 7th, or Locative, case,
of many words may be formed by the following substitutions.
Singular. Plural.
For final ^ Gen. asija ^TT»Tf anani.
a ) Loc. IT e XTH eshu.
For final ^ Gen. ^T* eh S^TT inam.
i )
"5 i J Loc. sjjfj au ishu.
Ex ^TTT^Z] rctmaxya, ' of Rama ; ^TTTC samvdre, ' in the
fV-s , , , -N .
ocean;' t're< 011 t'le shore; ^cJJ^T devanam, 'of the
gods;' gravies/in, 'in the villages;' jf^J hareh, 'of
Haricfi^Nf kavindm, ' of the poets agnau, ' in the
fire patishu, ' among the masters.11
Exercise 18.
68.—Rama dwells in the wood. He saw the house of Ravanu,.
He sees a garland of flowers in the hand of the Brahman. Men
dwell in houses. The family of tbe jackal dwells in the wood.
He stands in the midst of the fires. He saw the crow on the
shore of the sea. He sees the flower fallen into the fire.
^ ^ ^PRfrr I 3RT cftl ^
XT^frT I ^TTTTT n^T ^T^ STp TT-
f%FToR: ^^ I TO f^T I
efiTcRT'TT TO ^^t WfrF I ^"^NR ^STFTT TT^fT
.___ nO
^BfrT I
LESSON XXII t.
23
s Lesson 18.
J
69.—Adjectives, when declined, are declined like nouns. They
are very commonly, however, prefixed, in their crude form, to the
noun—and then they remain unaltered throughout the declen-
sion, forming a class_of compounds termed Karmifia^dharay^.
Thus the adjective c^HIJ krishna, ' black,1 with the noun
sarpa, ' a snake,' may be written cfJ^JTH krishnah sarpah,
or krishnasarpak^ a black snake f and again ^JTJTl^
m}j krishnena sarpena, or 14
black snake.'
70.—The following list of adjectives may be committed to
memory. An opposite meaning is given to an adjective by pre-
fixing a or ^SfrT an. Thus ^flt^q atulya, ' unlike^JfrT-
~ N ^ vo
f^^f anuchita, ' improper.'' In the neuter gender t.he_adjectives
jniiy he nsed-as^dmrl^. Thus H^fcT
sigh/ran gachchJiati,
lie goes quickly.'
Vocabulary 5.
cfjHIJ krishna, black. t^Cl Sanskrit a, polished.
sukla, white. fjjlj priya, beloved.
nila, blue. kshudra, mean. •9
rakta, red. *"l Tl ananta, endless.
TT^T mahat,* great. chitra, variegated.
cfj? balm, much. tulya, like.
alpa, little. dirgha, long.
'nighra, swift. ^[^cf liraswa, short.
mancla, slow. ^cj nava, new.
sadhu, good. oq vyakulft, perplexed. A- -3
This usually becomes mahd in compound words.
24
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.
V
Lunya, empty. sthula, bulky.
Cs Cx
sunclara, beautiful. dura, distant.
TfjT^J yogya, suitable. ft^^T vismita, astonished.
vriddha, aged. f^q^ sthira, firm.
£
dakshina, southern. i^j
^f^Ef^" uchita, proper.
Like the participles mentioned at No. 52, the adjectives that
end in a generally make the feminine in a and the neuter in am.
Thus flTOT P'iyd kanyd, ' a beloved girl
â– V-) dakshinam aranyam, ' the southern forest.'
Lesson 19.
71.—In the formation of Karmmadhdraya (No. 69) and other
compounds (as well as in cases where one word in a sentence
immediately follows another—see No. 20—) some change often
takes place in the two letters thus brought together. Some rules
and remarks in regard to these changes here follow.
72.—Similar vowels are those that differ only in length. Thus
a and a are similar; i and i; u and u, &c. Others—as i and u
—are dissimilar.
j 73.—Two similar vowels, meeting, coalesce and form one long
L ' jvowel. Ex. a + a = a\ a + d = a; a + a = &•, d + a = d;
i + i = t, &o.
• ■| 74.—If a word end with a or a when the next begins with a
\Jt ) b
dissimilar simple vowel, then a gun a substitute (see No. 17) takes
the place of the two concurring vowels. Thus a + i = e~,
a + u = o ; a + ri = ar.
, , .v 75.—If a word end with a or a when the next begins with a
P / diphthong, then a substitute calked vrAddJti takes the place of the
two concurring vowels. The vriddhi substitute of e or ai is ai;
and that of o or au is an.
. . 76.—If a word ends with i, u, or ri—short or long—when the
U ) next begins with any other dissimilar vowel, then i is changed to
its semivowel y,—u to v, and ri, to r. /"
<9*
LESSON XXII t. 33
Exercise 19.
77.—Turn the following pairs of words into Karmmadharaya
compounds—paying attention to the rules indicated as applicable
to each—and putting each compound in the nominative singular.
fj^f sanskrita + sj f^h ukti (No. 74), ' polished speech.'
'---â–
anania + rT dtman (Nos. 73 and 74), 'the infi-
nite soul.1 rf)^ nila + utpala, ' a blue lotus.' T^J
mahd + ^(jf^T rishi (Nos. 74 and 17), ' a great sage.'
Lesson 20.
78.—When the case of a noun depends upon another noun or
participle, the dependent noun may be prefixed in its crude form
to the other, making the compound called Tutpurusha. For ex-
ample ' the shore of the sea,' samudrasya tiram,
may be expressed thus, samudra-t'iram, ' the sea-
shore.'
79.—In a Tutpurusha compound the first term, in the crude
form, has sometimes the force of a Genitive, sometimes of a Lo-
cative, &c. For example—in the compound n^+^T^f panka-
mnffna 'mud-sunk,' the word 'mud' has evidently the force of
the Locative—the meaning being 'sunk in the mud.' Again—
^gfofTSjj^J lobhdkrishta, ' greed-attracted,' evidently means 1 at-
tracted by greed '—the first term having the force of the Instru-
mental case.
Exercise 20.
80.—Turn the following pairs of words into Tatpurusha
compounds—writing each compound in the Nominative_singular.
'The influx (^"FFf dgama) of wealth (^q artha:— No.
73). ' A hundred (^T^f sat a [n.]) of fools (T^t murkha).'
' Sport (sffeT krkld) in the water.' ' The shore of the Ganges
(T^T gangdy ' [Who has] come (^TFTcT agata) for refuge
26 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
(^TT^Tf mrana): ' Deserted hina) by learning (f^RJT
vidyaY ' Covered (iff%(T veshtita) with clothes (cf^f vastra)'
'A couple dicaija [n.]) of verses ("^cfi iiok).' 'Lord
(â– qf^f pati) of the earth (Tjftjaft prithvi).' ' The bank of a
pond OflT^T saras).'
\
Exercise 21
rRT: TOcftt TTr3T ^T^TOt ^f^W^T ^f 1
TT=T fcRJTfM ^nTT STTWT ^TTf^r
^irr i ^tm^ vr^ M^H I
"^T^TO ^R ^TrlT HHT f^f^TTrTT I
C\
Lesson 21.
^81.—The Pronouns are declined in most respects like nouns.
The 1st and 2nd personal pronouns are very irregular. The
following, being some of the most useful forms in which these
present themselves, may be committed to memory.
_ • .
Nom. t^jJ aham, I. cflf vaycim, we.
_• _ _
Acc. T^T mam, me. asman, us.
Inst. 7TOT maya, by me. ^S^TTlf^' asrndbhih, by lie.
Gen. mama, my. asmdkam, our. o^
___
Nom. f5f twam, thou. 7J7J yuyam, you.
Cv
Acc. roff twam, thee. "Zfm yushman, you.
Inst. j^ifJ twayd, by thee. H'm\'fi\',yuslimobhih, by you.
Gen. ^fof tava, thy. (44 |cj) yushmdkam, your.
LESSON XXII t. 27
Norn. ^JJ sah, lie (or 'that'). ^ te, they (or 'those').
A.ee. ^ tarn, him. cTT«T them.
Inst. ^^ tena, by him. ^ taih, by them.
Dat. (T^TT tasmai, to him. cP^T! tebhyali, to them.
Abl. flWcT tasmat, from him. tebhjah, from them.
Gen. tasya, his. ^TT teshdm, of them.
rTW
Loe. df^i^ tasmin, in him. ^f^J teshu, in them.
82.—The feminine of this pronoun is ^J sd, ' she,' or ' that'
In the neuter we have tad, ' that,1 and HTf^T t('lni> ' those.1
-------------v -— ^ -
83.—A useful demonstrative pronoun is formed by prefixing
IT e to the foregoing. Thus XT^J eshah, ' he,' ' thisTT^J
elad, 'this.' The pronoun^* idam,_' this,' makes ^Zf ayam__
in the Nominative singular masculine. L ^ iy i-j C^ MJ-F
84.—As observed at No. 64, the interrogatives begin with k,
and the relatives with y. Thus cfij kali, ' who ?' cf^T^Tcf kasmat,
\
'from whom?1 or, 'from what?1 If J yah, 'who,' TJ^TJI'^'
yasmdt, ' from whom,1 or, ' from which.1
85.—The Nom. sing. neut. of cfij kali is fsfj kirn, ' what?'
. ^86.—The indeclinable affixes chit, api, and chana, added to the
several cases of the interrogative pronoun, give them an indefi-
nite signification. Thus ^f^fT ka'schit, (No. 25) ' somebody,'
or, ' anybody —^jfafVcT kenachit, ' by some one—fcflP^fT
kincliit ' something.'
/
Exercise 22.
87.—Write the following phrases in Sanskrit.
Where is my son? Where is thy book? The jackal, seen by
thee, will abandon the forest. The crow, seen by me, abandons
the tree. When (was) this speech beard by him ? By whom
28
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
(was) the speech of the Brahman heard ? Where does their
father dwell? This is our house. Where is your house? Who
sees you ? Some one sees you. Who dwell in those houses ?
This speech (was) heard by a certain Brahman. The king gave
wealth to hinn. ""
Lesson 22.
88.—The mas. nom. sing. sah, ' he,' ' that,' and XXIj;
eshah 'this,' drop the visarga when a consonant follows. Thus
^ sa gachchhati, ' he goesITEf IJ^TZJ; esha manu-
shyah ' this man.'
80.—The conjunction ' and1 is expressed by xf cha, which is
placed after the second word. Thus fxj^T vy pitdputra'scha,
' the father and the son.' In the same way the conjunction ^J vd,
' or':—thus fcfrfT <=(Tpita putra vd, 'the father or the son.'
o "
Vocabulary 6.
fsfiTtT Mntu, but. ^fq
apt, also, even.
yadi, if. chet> if-
fffj? tarhi, then, in that case. ^J no chet, if not.
—T parantu, but, on the
other hand. Tf /«, because.
90. —When the subject or object of the verb is a whole clause,
the clause is concluded by the conjunction "^f^T iti, ' thus."
For example^J^T ITO^ fSTcT ^fcT ^fT
rdvano rcmena jita, iti may a srutaniy 4 Ravana was conquered by
Rama—thus (has been) heard by me :'— or ^["JcfTIlT TTT^JT
f^TcT ^IWlf^: ruvano rdmena jita, iti vadaii
vdlmxhih, ' Valmiki says Ravana was conquered by Rama.'
Exercise 23.
A tiger also dwells in the southern forest. Then he dwelt in
LESSON XXII t.
29
a garden, but now lie wanders on the sea-shore. Something fell
again. In our village is a master ofjpoets. When is an empty
house beautiful? The girl and herjiged father and mother are
here. The poet says the tiger went to Kasi. Is this man or
that boy suitable? "Unexpectedly a mouse fell from the seat.
Again the Brahmans cross over the water. Everywhere he con-
quered the enemy. Thus the monkey will burn their houses.
The horse went, but the jackal even now stands. Sometimes the
devotee wandered here. The traveller heard the sound of a lute
somewhere. That man knew the scriptures. After that he went
slowly to the old tree. Thus he took the books and the arrows,
with (his) hand, from the thief. Among the Brahmans is a good
preceptor. He will sometimes cook the food suitably. The pre-
ceptor says, Who laughed then ?
Lesson 23.
91.—In making the passive voice of the present and some of
the other tenses, the letter 71 ya is added to the root—and the
—*--— -r-.----
terminations called the dtmane-^ada are suJjjmned. Thus, the
dtmane-pada termination of the 3d pers. sing, present bein^
-v —s
^ te, we have cJ^TcT dahyate, it is burned, "CJxJffT pachyate,
' it is cooked,' &c.
92.—Some verbs are conjugated in the active voice, with the
terminations called the dtmane-pada. For example:
-n
yat, ' to strive ' makes yatate, ' he strives.'
^IT ram, ' to sport •— T^H ramate, ' he sports.'
Zoe/i, to see ' — vTT^cT lochate, 'he sees."
^ -n j
^fH vrit, 'to be' — cf^fo varitate, he is.'
t. ^ '
Tftl^ subh, ' to shine ' — sobhate, ' lie shines.'
shah, 'to endure '— sahate, ' he endures.'
, ."N -s
shev, to seive' — sevate, ' he serves.'
^"f^ shitii, ' to smile' — smayatc, ' he smiles.'
30 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
Exercise 24.
Translate the following sentences.
The crow is seen by the jackal. The father is abandonoLby
the son. The oblation is burned by the fire. The food is cooked
by the man. The deer sports in the forest. The Brahman endures
pain. The girl smiles. He sees crows on the tree. The king
shines in the assembly. Why is the gardener perplexed ?
â– faerr ^tjj sriT i tt^t ^N^t
^T Wm I TpT^i i ^^TT ST^flft
fWn 'ft^TOSi ^T^ I WIT f^T
n!)
^ft^T^T frpaftT II 7
Lesson 24.
93.—Verbs of the 2nd conjugation do not insert the vowel a
tjo , _ ecu
before the tense-affixes (No. }7). Thus the verb ^ its, ' to
be,' makes ^f^f asti, ' he is.'
Of the verb ' to be ' the following portions may be committed
to memory.
Present.
Singular. Plural,
asti, he is. ^fcf santi, they are.
Preterite.
^RT^ftcT usit, he was. ^TT^TC asan, they were.
Imperative.
Wy astu> lpt it be. santu, let them be.
Potential.
\
^TT(T s'J('t,' he may (or should) be.' syuh, ' they may be/
Exercise 25.
There is in that wood a certain tree. Thy father is not in the
LESSON XXII t. 31
house. There was water everywhere. Thus let it be, said the
Brahman. The son should not be perplexed. In the empty
village was an aged jackal. Let the horses be beautiful. The
garden i9 distant. The preceptors should be good men. He
says it is proper. That man said it was improper. Having
seen the deer sunk in the mud, the jackal laughed.
w^nftr i ^ntfto crfwj ^R
Jj^R I cT*TT rift farTT
I rT^T T^^T ^rTT qnq ^T^T: FT: I
94.—In addition to the rules for the treatment of visarga given
in Nos. 21, 24, and 48, it is to be observed that ah, when any fy
vowel but short ^gj a follows, drops the visa/r/a. Thus 3N |J^ff
^TT^ftrT srigala cisit, ' there was a jackal.' —
95.—The vowel a drops when it comes after a word ending
• in o or IT e. Thus r^T S nar(> dya, ' the man to-
day;' ^ S ^f ^ te'tra na sanii 'they are not here.'
The character £ serves, like an apostrophe, to mark the place of
the expunged vowel.
Lesson 25.
The following are useful verbs of the 2nd conjugation. ^
sf bru, to speak (or say), sf^ h-ute, he speaks.
C\ C\
«( vach, to speak. off^ vakti, he speaks.
ZfT yd, to go. ^ITfrT yuti' goes.
TJTTT shnd, to bathe. ^jTlfH &ndti> he bathes.
^ han,
to kill. ^fej
hanti, he kills.
96.—The characteristic peculiarity of the 3d conjugation is the w
reduplication of the radical syllable. For examples:—<»J d-d, 'to
give 1 makes daddti, ' he gives.'
32
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
97.—The characteristic of the 4th conjugation is TJ ya. Ex-
amples:—
f^JTf kuhip, to throw.
^ r^ jan, to be produced.
TTJT5J nets, to perish.
\
pad, to go.
"3JV yudh, to fight,
f^n* vid, to exist
fojUjf^T kshipyati, he throws.
jay ate, it is produced.
ri^f^T nasyati, he perishes.
padyate, he goes.
^SlfT yudhyate, he fights.
vidyate, it exists.
98.—The characteristic of the 5th conjugation is the syllable
^ nu—changeable, under ordinary circumstances, to no. Ex-
^.o—
ainplcs:—
up> t0 obtain.
^EJcfi sak, to be able.
^rrsrrfa opnoti, he obtain,s.
gr^tl fff saknoti, he is able.
c$)
99.—TheJ3th conjugation, like the 1st, takes a short ^ a
but does not, like the 1st, substitute gitna (No. 17;. Ex-
amples:—
^ trip, to satisfy.
jt^ ish, to wish
Mt^ praclichh, to ask.
qfv^ncT
TT
t.
mri, to die.
spris, to touch.
cTTTfcT tfipati, he satisfies.
^ V^ffT ichchhati, he wishes.
TJ^fa prichchhati, he asks.
—- — -
mriyate, he dies.
^Tfjf^" spri'sati, he touches.
Q>
100.—The 7th conjugation. . in certain tenses, inserts ^ na
before the final of_the_xQOi^ Examples :—
fiT^ bhid, to break. fi^r^f^ bhinatti, he breaks.
his, to injure. f^J^f^T hinasti, he injures.
LESSON XXV.
33
101.—The 8t-h conjugation adds u (wliich in certain cases
becomes ^"f o). Examples :—
kri, to do or make. karoti, he makes.
Other parts of this verb are "^^RJ^ chakara, 'he made;'
^jf^Tf^T karishyati, ' he will make ;' cp^fff kuryydt, ' he
should make.' '
102.—The 9th conjugation subjoins nd. Examples :—
44grail, to take. ^pia^f^T grihndti, he takes.
SjT jnc'l< to know. ^T^jf^ jdndti, he knows.
103.—The 10th conjugation_subjoins ^ i,_which is liable,
among other things, to be changed to its improper diphthong
XT e, and that again, before a vowel, to ^fTJ ay (by No. 18).
Examples:—
cfi*T hath,
to tell. «R3TOf(T hathayati, he tells.
chit, to think. fxjTi^lf^f chintciyati, he thinks.
matr, to advise. T^^f^f^f mantrayali, he advises.
Exercise 26.
Translate the following sentences.
The son says. Rama kills Ravana. The king gives wealth to
the Brahman. The girl throws the flowers. How is a blue lotus
produced here ? Ravana fights, but, conquered by Rama, he
perishes. An enemy of that man does not exist anywhere. He
obtains wealth. Not any one is able. He satisfies the sons with
food. What does that man wish ? Why does not any one ask
him ? The man, having gone to the sea-shore, dies. The girl
does not touch the flower. The son breaks the fruit from the
tree. The good man does not injure any one. What is he
doing ? He takes the book. No one knows. Why does he not
tell? Thus he thinks. He does not thus advise.
34
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
Lesson 26.
In tlie following exercise the verbs given in the preceding les-
son are exhibited in the various forms treated of in Nos. 28, 30,
39, 52, 55, 57, and 61,—a reference to which rules may enable the
learner to translate the phrases.
Exercise 27.
5TTW I TRsT fw l^fcT I
o SI
^ ^ ^rfwfa i TTO[ f^fw "^fcr i T^T
sTT?3T ^TT^cftt I ^jfacT cT^TT H I
facTT ^ Tjft^T Ht ^frT I ^T: ^iT^iT ^T
fef^ ^RfacT I % ^TT: I ^T^TTf^T cT^
n --— --
^TTcTTfH ^tenOT ^ TTW ^ I TTTrT
m^T *T^fcT I ^ ^TTH I ^ ^T^rfS I
If the disciple shall ask, then he will obtain ; if not, he will
not obtain. Having seen the ocean, he goes to the mountain.
The monkey sports in the garden, and in the wood, and on the
bank of the pond. They say the traveller will die. Why do the
boys break the garlands P Sometimes he speaks improperly.
The beautiful girl bathes in the ocean. Having drunk water he
goes to the sacrifice. Thus he wandered and there he dwelt.
The father, having seen (his) son, smiles. Everywhere and
always disciples thus serve (their) preceptors. They endure great
pain. The Brahman, deserted by learning, does not shine in the
assembly. Sin is produced by anger. Good men quickly obtain
great prosperity.
Lesson 27.
104.—Two or more words coupled together by the conjunction
' and' may, with omission of the £ and,' be made into a compound
called a Dwandwa. If there be only two words in it, the compound
LESSON XXII t.
35
takes the terminations of the Dual number. The nom. dual ter-
mination of a noun ending in ^ a is ^[j ait. Thus ' Rama
and Lakshmana' may be expressed by either ^T'T^ WH^TU^T
ramo-ldkshmanascka, or ^IHorJ^TTJJ f rama-lakshman.au.
105.—When a PwandiocL. compound contains more than two
terms, it generally takes the termination of the plural. Exam-
ple :— t brdlimana-kshatriya-vit-sudrdh,
' the Brahman, and Kshatriya, and Vais'ya, and Sudra.'
106.—Verbs, as well as nouns and pronouns, have a dual
nHmber. The 3d pers. dual of the present tense ends in
fTt tail. Thus y+Trjfr of^TrTI ruma-lakshma-
nau vane vasaf.ah-, ' Rama and Lakshmana dwell in the forest:—
eJfTofil of^fT; kakau vrikshe vasatah, ' two crows dwell
in the tree.'
107.—When two or more words are put together to form an
epithet, the compound is calledFor example:—
^â– pfTVTJ namadheija, meaning a ' name,' we may have the
epithet TPft^fcH M^^TT^HT p>dt,aliputra-ndmadhpya, ' the name
of which is Pataliputra.' Such an epithet, like an adjective,
agrees with its noun. Thus tTT^RtflT^'^TTT^Pi J5""
taliputra-namadheyan nagaram, ' a city named Pataliputra:'—
cfl"J|^T* kusa-hasto narah, ' a man with kusa-grass in
his hand.'
108.—A word in the genitive case very commonly dispenses
with the case-ending, and forms a Tat^urm/ia)compound with the
governing word. Thus 1|T5Rfi* devdndm ydjakah, ' a
worshipper of the gods,' may be expressed by ^cTJTT^T^i* deva-
yajakah. In the majority of instances the Tatpuruaha compound
involves a genitive case, but words in other cases can enter irsto
composition in this way. For example, we have the instrumental
case in kdka-peya, ' to be drunk by a crow,'—applied to
a river with muddy water, fit only for a crow's beverage.
44
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
109.—The changes (referred to in No. 71) when heterogeneous
letters come together, in compounds or in sentences, are not
confined to the vowels. The principal rule in regard to the
changes of the consonants is the following.
110.—A hard consonant (No. 24) before a soft consonant
is changed to the soft of its own class; and vice versa.
Thus mahat + bha\ja — TT^^If mahadbhaya,
' great fear.'
111.—A dental consonant coming before a palatal or a cere-
bral is changed to a corresponding letter :—for example ^TT xl
tat cha becomes ^^ tachcha, 'and that.' The pronunciation is
not so much altered by this, but that one who knows the separate
words can readily recognise them when so combined. The same
remark applies to the change of ^ na to '^JJ na in certain cases
—as when preceded by ^ ra.
112.—The letters t and ^T s meeting become chchh.
The commonest instance of this occurs in ^^ tat +
____x -a
srutwa = (fx^n | tachchhrutwd, ' having heard that.'
Exercise 28.
The two sons go to the sea-shore. The crow and the jackal
dwell in the forest. Having heard that, the deer abandons the
forest. There is, on the bank of the Ganges, a city named Kas'i.
Why do the preceptor and the disciple again go to the garden ?
AVhen will the snake, the mouse, and the horse dwell in one
place P Men of slow understanding are infinite. A man of
great wealth wishes thus. A boy and a girl of good family are
here. A village of empty houses is not distant. A man of great
merit says so. A boy beloved by (his) mother and a girl beloved
by (her) father are here.
Lesson 28.
113.—In the native Sanskrit grammar, all the varieties of de-
clension are educed from a set of technical terminations which
LESSON XXII t.
37
the learner will find it well worth his while to commit to memory.
They are to be read across the page—thus " su, au, jas" &c.
Sing. Dual. ^IT aii. Plur.
Nom. H su. o "5TH jas.
A cc- ♦ am. s TJT^T sas.
Inst. td. / bhydmâ– bhis.
Dat. He. ^JJ bhydm. VZffT bhyas.
Abl. ^fa nasi. • bhydni. ^fff bhyas.
Gen. ^^ has. \ ^tfT OS. \ dm.
Loc. ^TTO 06. ^flj sup.
114.—The vocative has no separate termination, it being con-
sidered as a modification only of the nominative.
115.—Now, of these inflectional terminations it is to be re-
marked, that some of the letters serve only to form syllables and ^ ^
to facilitate enunciation: they disappear, therefore, when those 3T ^ j0^
letters which are essential are applied to the word to be declined. r^J -> ^
These auxiliary letters are the u of su ; the j of jas; the S of -y ^
sas; the t of aut and ta; the h everywhere; the i of nasi; and
the p of sup. It is also to be observed that a final ^ a is f
changed to visaraa.^The actual terminations therefore will be :— ^
Sing. Dual. Plur. Tf
Nom. I h
Acc. ^ am.
Inst. t^TT a.
Dat. IT e.
Abl. ^Sfl ah.
Gen. ^fj ah.
Loc. ^ i.
Dual. ^TT au. Plur.
w- ah.
^TT au ah.
♦ bhydm. fa: bhili.
Wff bhydm. bhyah.
Wff bhydm w?: hhyah.
oh. ^TT dm.
^ft: oh. su.
38 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
116.-—In applying these terminations to the final letter of
the word to be declined., recollection must be had of the rules
for the permutation of vowels and consonants. For example, in
declining the word t^J nan, 'a ship,' it must be remembered
that aw, followed by a vowel, becomes ^J^- av; and that
s becomes If sh when it follows any other vowel than a or
a and is not final. Thus :—
Sing. Dual. Plur.
Nom. VTTJ nauh, a ship, ^"["aff ndvau, two ships. ndvali,
[ships.
Acc. ndvaru, a ship, r( |"SfY ndvau, ndvah,
Inst, rjf cfX navd, by --naubhydm, ^jf^J naubhih,
-s .
Dat. rfT"^ nave, to — \ naubhydm, ^"fHJJ naubhyah,
Abl. ndvah, from | naubhydm, "^JWift nwubhyah.
Gen. *7Jcf! ndvah, of — ®Tt« ndvoh, ^To[f ndvdm,
Loc. navi, in — ^T^Tf! ndvoh, naushu,
Exercise 29.
Write down, with the signification, the following cases of the
following words, viz.:—
Inst, sing., inst. plu., and loc. plu., of ukti, ' speech.'
Gen. sing, and inst. sing, of at/nan, ' soul ' or ' self.'
Loc. sing, and gen. plu. of f^T dis, ' a side ' or ' direction.'
Loc. sing, of manas, ' the mind.' Inst. sing, and inst.
plu. of agni, ' fire.' Nom. dual and loc. plu. of t^^
nadl, 'a river.' Loc. plu. of stri, 'a woman.' Dat. sing.,
inst. plu., and loc. plu. of flfcf pitri, ' a father.' Inst. sing.,
dat. sing., abl. sing., inst^jplu., and gen. plu. of ofp^ vach,
LESSON XXII t.
47
speech.' Inst. sing, of Tf^cT marut, ' the wind.' Loc. sing,
of sarad, 'autumn.' Gen. plu. of if^TJ^f dhimai,
' sensible.' Loc. sing, of saras, ' a pond.' Gen. plu.
madhu-lih, ' a bee.'
Lesson 29.
117.—As the native Sanskrit grammar presents one scheme of
terminations which, by means of the requisite substitutions, may
be accommodated to all nouns, so it presents one scheme of ter-
minations which, with the requisite substitutions, becomes appli-
cable to all the tenses of every^verb. These terminations are
enunciated in a different order, as regards person, from that to
which the European reader is accustomed,—the personality appli-
cable to what is spoken of being the first, and that applicable to the
speaker being the third. Instead of naming the persons by num-
bers, therefore, it may be advisable here to give them the epithets
appropriated to them in the native grammar,—calling that which
is spoken of the 4 Lowest,' the one spoken to the ' Middle,' and the - UyJ> f)
speaker the ' Highest' person. ^ :L.i^f^tJ^ i/^
118.—The terminations are as follows:— .«or
Sing. Dual. Plur.
^/L^-Lowest. f^nr tip. rT^ <«*• f^ jld. (3rb
fytM^k -"iMiddle, f^q sip. TZf^ thas. tha. â– .. 2
SftaJfr^-, Highest. frfTT mip. a| J^J 'cos. fl^ mas. [ / k/ ,
119.—In these, as in the inflectional terminations of nouns,
(No. 113), some of the letters serve to indicate certain operations;
and these are rejected when the termination is affixed to the verb.
After the requisite rejections and substitutions, the terminations
appear as follows:—
^ fa ti. en tall.
J1. f^T si. TEf: thah. TZf lha.
fTT mi. oft vah. J^i mah.
40
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
120.—Adding these terminations to the root ad, ' to eat.,'
and changing its final soft consonant to a hard one (No. 110) when
the affix begins with a hard consonant,we have
aiti, he eats. attah, they two eat.
[adanti, they eat.
T^l'fr^rl ai8i thou eatest. atthah, you two eat. ^(-TZJ
[attha, you eat.
f*J| admi, I eat. adwah, we two eat.
[admah, we eat.
121.—When the short vowel a precedes the m or v of the tense-
affix, it is lengthened. Thus we have ^cfjf^ Lhavami, ' I be-
come —i^f^fQJjfrr bhavishyami, ' I will become.''
122.—In order that the foregoing set of terminations may
serve for other tenses than^the__pi£sent, they require to be vart_
ously modified. For instance, as may be gathered from No. 28,
the syllable T^ZJ sya requires to be interposed when the sense
is to be future. Again, to express time past, (that of the . 1st
preterite) the final j_of_the singular is dropped, and the yowel
a is prefixed to the verb as an augment. Thus
abhavat, ' he became.'
123.—'I,' 'thou,1 and ^ 'he,' are declined in the
dual as follows :—â–
Nom. ^sn^i
At
Inst. ^TTTWT
Dat.-------
Abl.--
Gen. WSRT:
hoc.--
^T^TT
rTT
cTT*rr
cT^rr:
LESSON XXII t.
41
Exercise 30.
Translate the following sentences.
Who art thou? I go to the village. Tliey two will go to the
village. Do you two go to the wood ? Shall we two go to the
sea-shore7 ^Thou seest my house. What dost thou? What
dost thou wish? What dost thou say? I do not say anything.
Art thou able, or not ? I am not able. I see thy son.
-0 Jfi rp^TTf: I I
^TTTrT ^rr: I ^f^nf ^T I fw-
\ O _____N , ^ —--
trrftr i ^(i Tj^Jif^Tfa i ^T^RT stfa
^ ----
jff I ri ^rPr I
Lesson 30.
124.—The infinitive is formed by adding ^ turn. Ex.
yalum, 'to go.'
Many verbs insert 7 i before . Ex. i^f^^f bhavitinn, ' to
Decome.'
The following is a list of infinitives.
Sfi t. kri makes o karttum, to make.
gam — gantum, to go.
fir ji — %
dd — ^TrT datum, to give.
dri's —• drashtum, to see.
shtha — sthdtum, to stay.
rack — livO vaktum, to apeak.
42 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
Exercise 31.
Translate the following sentences.
Ravana is not able to conquer Rama. The father wishes to
give the book to the son. The two sons wish to go to the wood.
Dost thou wish to go to the sea-shore ? I wish to see my father.
Do you two wish to stay here ? What dost thou wish to do ?
It is improper to do thus. To speak thus is unsuitable.
WT JT^fa^fer I rt ^^Jcft' cTTTT ??
f^rTTT I cR WTcT ^T^TlfafcT fqcTT ^fcT I
I V^T ^TrT ^T^T I
Lesson 31.
125.—The present participle active ends in ^Tff at. Thus
i^cf^" bhavat, ' being J {-43H gachchhat, ' going ,' f^T^^
tishthat, ' staying.'
This participle is declined as follows:—â–
^ /- Nom. gachchhan, ' going.'
Sing. ]
v Acc. gachchhantam.
Dual Nom. and Acc. TJ^r^f gachchhantau.
t
Plu- Nom. gachchhantah.
The
rest of the declension may be effected by subjoining the
terminations from No. 114.
126. The indefinite past participle active ends in to-
vat:— as ^{^cffT hritavat, ' was making.' It is declined like the
c \
present participle (No. 125), except that it takes a long vowel in
the nom. sing.—thus cficTTf'T hritavdn. It is commonly used
6 \
With an auxiliary verb—thus ^ ^cR-Rf^f ahan kritavdn
asmi, ' I was doing.'
O
LESSON XXII t.
43
127.—A class of futurepzrticip~.es, most extensively employed,
is formed by the affixes T^J tavya, amy a, and ya-
Examples. i^f^fj^oEf bhavitavya,' what is to be or ought to be;'
sahaniya, ' what is to be endured ^rfVZT labhya, ' to
be acquired.'
The following are further examples :—
<=lrMi vaktavya, to be spoken.
bkajya, to be worshipped.
'SJ^T sahya, possible.
scihya, endurable.
kdryya, to be made, or done.
drashtavya, to be seen.
gantavya, to be gone.
128.—The future participle is much used in the nom. sing,
neuter. Thus IJ
by thee '—i. e. ' thou art to go : —^f^J ^f^rfolf f^T ' thus is
it to be become by him 1—i. e. ' thus must he become.'
Exercise 32.
Translate the following,sentences.
cT^T ^Tfq 7T I ^t
^amrTm^m i s ^T^T
^ffT I | TTT^ W^ p^T n^N I ^T
TiT^rcN i fa i
Lesson 32.
129.—Verbs compounded with prepositions sometimes retain
the meaning of the original; more frequently they have the
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.
sense of their component elements; but in many instances
they have significations which depart widely from those which
they might be expected, from their composition, to convey. The
explanation of such compounds is the province of the dictionary.
130.—Of the twenty-one prepositions, the most useful here
follow, the sense being exemplified in verbs or in derivatives,
of frequent occurrence, from verbs compounded with the prepo-
sitions.
all, ' beyond.'' , ^ff^TSRTlf^T atikrdmati, ' he goes
after 1 (as a disciple goes after and imitates his preceptor).
beyond.'
^Tf^J'TcT adhigata, 'gone over' (as
a book when read through).
^mj^f^f apaharati, ' he carries
off;
abhi, 'opposite.'
a, ' reversing.'
Wm^fHdgachchhaii,' he comes.'
^n^Tfo ddadati, ' he takes.'
^TJ upa, ' near.'
^ftrerT upatishthate, 'lie stands
near.'
nir, ' without.'
pari, ' around.'
Tff^ prati, ' again, back.'
f^^JEf nirdosha, ' without fault.'
Hf^Rj paridhi, ' perimeter.'
vi, ' apart.'
sam, ' with.'
f^fepTT! vikdra, ' change of form.'
cangama, ' association.'
LESSON XXII t.
45
131.—Of prepositions used separately or without verbs, Tlf?T
prati, ' towards,' governs the accusative; ^^ saha, ' with,' go-
verns the instrumental, and f^J^J vinci, ' without, except,' either
the accusative or the instrumental.
Exercise 33.
Translate the following sentences.
This book is to be gone over by thee. The disciples go after
the preceptor. Ravana carries off Sita. The traveller approaches
the tiger. The traveller does not approach the tiger without
fear. The father, with the son, stands near the tree. The crow
does not associate with the jackal. Day by day the crow and the
jackal associate with the deer. How is their disjunction to be
made ?
V^TrfrnfiTHfcT Hfrrf^H I ftrejT ^T^f^f^rT
I ^rTTTnTlTfTT TTW I f^TT ^T^t ^
IPT^: | ir=n I ^ HcfNltt ^
W&m I 3fi?r m^m s^ I TT^FT ^TTrT
vD wv-— *. ^ ^ \
facTT I ^^fimcTSJT^T TO
f^ ^f i
Lesson 33.
132.—It will have been observed, in Lesson 24, that the 3d pers.
sing, of the imperative ends in In the passive the termi-
nation is tarn—preceded by the ya of the passive (No. 9l).
Thus ^TTcTT sruyatdm, ' let it be heard ;' kriyatdm,
in . , ,
'let it be done;' drisyatdm, 'let it be seen;' vj-UJtff
uchyatam, ' let it be told.'
133.—In Lesson 24, the potential is exhibited ending in
yut—as ^ZZ^I^ kuryyat, he should make :'—but the form in
-a s,
46
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.
which it is more commonly met with is that of the 1st conjuga-
—\
tion, where it ends in T7ff et. Thus bliavet, ' he should
he ; ^cfTf! bhaveyuh, ' they should be.'
Exercise 34.
Translate the following sentences :—•
The preceptor should be a good man. The horse should oe
white. The disciple should not be perplexed. Let the wish be
heard by the father. Let the deer sport in the forest. Let the
beautiful girl smile. Let the crow go. Why should it be im-
proper to do thus? He should obtain merit. They should go
home. Let not injury be done to any one.
cR xn^ft ^J^cT I TTTrTT S^IT ^TTHt^TcT I
I fVr: TOSfiifo i ^Rfit
^ W^TcT I US smtf ^ fw^STTrT I "facT^f W
f^TH I OTT ffcftw^T: xj^TcT W- /«*
O \ sj) ^^^^____ ,______s __
farm i
..........v
EXTRACT XXVIII.
47
PART II.
DEING AN INTRODUCTION TO THE HITOPADESA.
Professor Johnson, in the Preface to his very useful edition of
the Hitopadesa, " with a grammatical analysis alphabetically
arrang notices, among the other recommendations of that
interesting collection of Sanskrit tales, that "In no single work
is there to be met with a more comprehensive assemblage of
serviceable words and phrases." " The moral verses with
which the Hitopadem abounds are (Mr. Johnson tells us), in
many cases, perhaps in all, quotations from different writers.
They consequently form a sort of anthology,—a collection of
passages, not only remarkable for striking thoughts, but offering
examples of various styles." These verses being considerably
more difficult of construction than the stories in which they are
inserted, the beginner will run the less risk of being disheartened
if he be required to construe the stories only in the first place,
—the verses (—except where they may be indispensable to the
narrative, or otherwise deserving of immediate notice—) being
laid aside for future consideration.
After some introductory verses, the compiler of the Ritopa-
desa proceeds as follows ■—
Extract 1.
mzfsVWUTWti wm I rR
v9 N
flt^rrfaTTTffftcT: «TT*T ^T^rfrTTTtftrr I
The king here mentioned having a set of idle sons, he secured
the services of the learned Vishnukarman, who undertook to re-
claim them by telling them stories calculated to excite in them
an interest in political affairs. The narrative proceeds as
follows:—
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.
WR^TTI q -^m I Ht ira^: ^pJIcT I
^TO^T^faRt^ ^iT^fr *T®f?T vfacTT^T
cl^R^R TjtlTIlf fa^m ^riH ^T n
(T^cTT f^RT^ ^T^^rHT^NT fafw 3TOT
^TftT I TT^T^^TT I Sfi^TcTTW I f^^iff-
sj) __ \ \
I WcT I fa WW wra
^Tfai: P
3WTOHT fa^^TT ^f^rT ^RT: I
________C\ C V3 V
The meanings of the words in these extracts are to be sought
in the accompanying analytical vocabulary culled from that of
Professor Johnson. The references by numbers are to Part
First of these Lessons.
Exercise 35.
Translate into Sanskrit the following sentences, which involve
words comprised in the foregoing extract, in addition to other
words already met with in Part First;—and write also, in San-
skrit, answers to the questions.*'
Where is the city named Pataliputra ? What city is on the
bank of the Bhagirathi ? Who was Sudarsana ? Where were
the princes seated ? How were they seated ? How does the
time of the wise pass away ? How does the time of fools pass
away ? ,
Extract 2.
* For example, in reply to the question, " How does the time of fools pass
away ?"—write, in Sanskrit, (as in the text,) "The time of fools passes away
in dissipation, slumber, or strife."
EXTRACT XXVIII.
49
rffcr^cfR fw^T^TT^TO I cR ^T^uf^-
xif^xot f^RHfor I ^ ^f^ ^RcT-
^^TTTT ^TT^T^tf tnsrf ST ^TTUTTTmcT I
N \
H^T I
C\
Exercise 36.
What did the princes say? Where was the great silk-cotton
tree ? What was on the banks of the God a van ? Who dwell
in the silk-cotton tree ? Having come from where ? What
was in the hand of the hunter ? Who saw the hunter approach-
ing ? Who went after the hunter ? What was done by the
hunter? Who remained, having become concealed?
Extract 3.
tt f^fcT f^^WT^RRoFr^T^T ^R^fh^mTO I
J \
The king of the pigeons warns his followers that danger
lurks under the grains of rice spread out in this uninhabited
quarter, and he tells them the following story, to show them the
danger of yielding to the temptation of covetousness.
^cTCTif: ^PTUfa I ^TfrTT^
TOW I ^^TH: WW' ^
n s^ C\
m VV** Ji ^priN^ Tj^cTT^ I rr
^fcT I
The traveller, not unnaturally, distrusts the tiger; but the
50
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
tiger (by means of learned poetical quotations) dissipates his
distrust; and the traveller, as directed by the tiger, goes into
the lake, preparatorily to the receipt of the golden bracelet, to
bathe.
cT
S^T oJTT^t ^^ I ^f T^l ^frTrfr I ^TrT-
I ^TfiT W. TJj^tRWT ^ ^nifto
Vrf: H ^ WmTf^rT: ^Tf^rT^ I
The warning against covetousness, conveyed in this story,
being thrown away upon the pigeons, they pounce down upon
the rice, and are ensnared in the net. By the advice of their
king (—who is too magnanimous to allude to their disregard of
his previous advice—) they make a joint effort, and fly off with
the net, leaving the hunter disappointed. They proceed to the
abode of Hiranyaka, king of the mice, a great friend of the
king of the pigeons, to whom they tell their tale, begging him
to cut their snare " by the force of his teeth".
Exercise 37.
At what time did the king of the pigeons behold the grains of
rice? How [in respect of his movements or his attendants] was the
king of the pigeons, when he beheld the grains of rice ? By the old
tiger what was said ? By the old tiger how circumstanced ? By
what was the traveller attracted? By whom was the lake entered
in order to bathe ? Who became immersed in a great quagmire ?
Having seen the traveller fallen into the quagmire, what did the
tiger say ? By whom was the traveller seized and devoured ?
The pigeons having been freed from the net by the teeth of the
mouse Hiranyaka, the crow, who had followed as a spectator,
seeks the friendship of the mouse. The mouse is exceedingly
suspicious and cautious, but the eloquence of the crow finally pre-
EXTRACT XXVIII.
51
vails, and they strike up a friendship. The crow takes the mouse
to visit a friend of his, the tortoise Manthara ; and, in the course
of their conversation, the tortoise tells the following story illus-
trative of the dangers of too strong a disposition to hoard.
Extract 4.
\ sd sQ
TT^nr ^R TcT: I ^ ij^fit I
TT^RT^R T^cTT ^ ^fiU 1 fl WT
^fiT: ^RT!! f (T: I ^T^TJTT^T^T^T ^TTVt
frrfa^ii^R ^ WcT I
Exercise 38.
There was a hunter;—what was his name? Where did the
hunter Bhairava go, on one occasion ? Having taken what, did
the hunter go to the wood ? What animal was killed by him in
the wood ? By whom was that animal there killed ? What
animal was seen by him going along, he having taken up the
deer ? By him, having done what, was the boar smitten ? By
him with what was the boar smitten ? Slain by the boar, like
what did that hunter fall P
Extract 5.
^ n t, n i
ws^R i ^T^WN^^T i ^rfr
HT77? ^RufelcR I I TJ^f TTR1RT-
WW m^R ^ I cTrT: IHR^R-
^jfa I ^TfiT cRT^ftcM'cTrTfr^ ^TR^R JcT-
v^RT ff^ fw Tier: I
52
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
Exercise 39.
Who saw the dead deer, hunter, and boar? Having belitld,
what did he think ? For whom did great store of food present
itself? By the flesh of whom will there be abundant food for
three months ? In the first desire to eat, what was first eaten
by the jackal ? The sinew-string being cut, who went to de-
struction ? How so?
While the three friends dwell happily 011 the wooded borders
of the lake, they are one clay joined by a frightened deer, as the
following extract tells us.
Extract 6.
^ ^TM^TIJHTTTT wi: ^RTfi? ^nfacTCcr-
tft^T frrfcnr: i cr?T: ^T^T^T^ awr^r
c\ g
^T^T ^TOHT^: I rTcTT vHTqcR^R ^t fa^T
H^lrnt Wt -^^tf^cT: I ^T^TTT^T IR: SI
fafei^faf^reT: I fl^rc^i^T? i ^ JOT crst^T ?T I
N C ^
^^T^rriRT -WRT^ I ^TTR^T^
fimt SRTJRTTcT: I
Exercise 40.
Who, on one occasion, having come there, met them ? Bv
whom was the deer alarmed ? Having supposed a cause of
alarm (to be) coming behind, what did the tortoise enter? What
did the crow, flying upwards, mount upon ? By the crow,
having looked afar, was any cause of alarm observed ? After-
wards what was said by (the tortoise) Manthara ? What does
(the deer) Dappled-bodied say ? Who came for refuge ?
Frightened by whom—did the deer come for refuse 3
O O
EXTRACT XXVIII.
53
Extract 7.
CN O
^rftH^r fa^ ^Tf^rT f% oETTVfl I
V \
WT^Tfacf^fit I UTrra H^T^
HfacfarfafcT ^TOIRT Tf^TcT fsfiv^ft ^R^l
' r^fa HTcT^PWFT ^^t^fH^T^r^T W ^T^
I cTSUWcTTH I rfB^rfT I f*R ^T-
^^n^t n^Tftr i ^T^wn-refa ^ra^T i fa^r
u^w n
Exercise 41.
What does Manthara, the tortoise, s'iy ? By whom was it
said "Friend deer!—by whom wast thou alarmed?" Also, by
whom was it said, " Do hunters ever roam in this uninhabited
forest?1' There is a king in the region of Kalinga:—what is
his name? From the mouth of whom is the rumour heard?
Who will go to another body of water ? What two said, " Friend !
—be it so ?"
Extract 8.
ffTTnr^t fawJT^l rT I tR^TTO^ TTT^ W-^TT^
cfi^w I ^T^cTT ^ ^t fw I
Hiranyaka, in the course of his remonstrance, tells the fol-
lowing story:—
Cs
^if wnsnfaRiRfa *TT i IRFI ^RrotniR f^ro^r
t -3
54
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
cTrR^WfT^R ^WTT^T flfcT^T I
v o v
Exercise 42
What did Hiranyaka here say ? Having done what—did
Hiranyaka say this ? In the forest of Brahma there is an ele-
phant : —what is his name ? Having beheld that elephant, what
did all the jackals think ? By whom was this thought ? Was
the elephant, by any contrivance, destroyed ? By whose con-
trivance was the elephant destroyed ? Who was destroyed here
by the contrivance of the jackal ? By means of whose body
may there be food for four months ? Of whom may the ele-
phant's body become the food ? By whom was the promise
made, viz., "The death of the elephant is to be accomplished by
me—" ? What was the promise of the old jackal ?
Extract 9.
TTTft WR-RT^r I ^r ^ I f^ft ^ I
Wri' SWRTrT: I FT I I
^N^lfafa: TOP HWfacT: I
^rfipTT TT^T ^TTrT ^ cT^IT^kl^
WT ^fHTmwm f^facT: I cFERT
^Trr: II
Exercise 43.
Thereupon, what did that deceiver do ? What was said bv
EXTRACT XXVIII.
55
the deceitful jackal? " My lord ! deign the favour of a look !"
—by whom was this said ? What does the elephant say ? " Who
art thou ?" —by whom was this said? "Whence hast thou
come ?"—by whom was this said ? Who said " I am a jackal11 ?
Is it proper, or not, to remain without a king ? How did t'his
jackal go off ?
Extract 10.
rRTt XFT TTS^mTf?: cjpftfcT^''
YTT^ fawn fzivti ^fhcTt I
ftr* I cTcTt f^TTl^Tt ^cft Y^^pr: 11
Exercise 43.
By what road does the elephant, by name Karpuratilaka, go ?
Attracted by what does the elephant go ? How does the ele-
phant go ? In what did the elephant become immersed ? What
was then said by the elephant ? By whom was it said, " Friend
jackal! what is now to be done " ? By the jackal, having laughed
aloud, what was then said ? " Having clapped your trunk to the
end of my tail, get up ;"—by whom was this said ? Who, and
how, was then eaten by the jackals ?
All the remonstrances of the deer, against the tortoise's ven-
turing across the country to another lake, are thrown away ;—
for we read as follows : —
Extract 11.
rTrrar^TO^ft^ HjfrTT ^T^TT-
ircfacT: i 3 fi^^T^jM^^r^F^: i
cTd' ^ ^Tfa STTV^ "3R S
56
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
WW' I cT ^rWT^ ^rfa
^jftofwnr ^TfTftnro THlTcT: I ^
c s
WT^TRW^fw: TTt Wl
Exercise 44.
Having left what—did Manthara, the tortoise, set out ? Who
set out with great fear? Having disregarded the speech of the
mouse, what did the tortoise do ? What did Hiranyaka and
the others then do ? Whom did Hiranyaka and the others
then follow ? Was the tortoise, going along on land, caught, by
any one or not ? By whom was the tortoise caught, going
along on land ? By a hunter, prowling about the forest, who
was caught ? Who then set out towards his home ? " Fortunate
am I !"—by whom was this said? Who then experienced extreme
grief? Who followed the hunter?
Extract 12.
TTT^i ^THJt â– STTTTO fawfa JTt^rT
\f)
HW> I rTT^cT: I H^t W^W^'ST I
r^ I ^T TTcTfTTor
^TW^T f^t ^Ncf I fl^tqft
^T f^fi^fq fen^cT I TJ^WT^T-
f^^T cT^ ^t JFrTapT I rTrTt
WVTm ^T^T ifaznfa |
Exercise 45.
Who said, " Let an ofl'ort be made lo liberate the tortoise "P
So long as the hunter does not emerge from the forest, what
EXTRACT XXVIII.
57
is to be done ? Having heard this, what did those two sny ?
Which two sny—" Quickly direct how we are to act " ? Having
gone near the lake, what shall the deer do ? Who shows him-
self motionless, as if dead ? Having stood over whom does the
crow mark him somewhat with his beak ? By the hunter,
desirous of flesh, what must then be done ? Having quitted the
tortoise, who then goes quickly near the deer ? Who will cut
the bonds of the tortoise ? Who said, " I will cut the bonds of
the tortoise " ?
Extract, 13.
^TTC ^TftTcT: i Tf^TT^^T vRT^t rT^rT-
vPTRTfa cTT^cT ^TRH^^f^RcT I ^f^cT^-
^rfrT TTHT^^F^TfT^- I cTcfr f^RTO:
Hf^: | TOJTT^ra ITIRTO^: ^T^T Tr^T
WH^jRTfelcTT: II
Exercise 46.
It having been thus done by the deer and the crow, by whom
were they seen P The hunter, wearied, having drunk what,
sat down under a tree P Who went near the deer, having seen
the deer in that condition P Having taken what—did the hunter
go near the deer P Having placed the tortoise where—did the
hunter go near the deer? By whom were the bonds of the tor-
58
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
toise cut ? Having his bonds cut, what did the tortoise do ?
What did the deer do, having seen the hunter close at hand ?
Having returned, does the hunter see the tortoise or not? Not
seeing the tortoise, what did the hunter think? Freed from their
calamities, what did the tortoise and the others do ?
The princes are of course delighted as well as edified by
Vishnu Sarman's stories, and the meeting breaks up with mutual
compliments. On the morrow the party re-assembles, and the
Second Book of the Hitopadesa commences as follows:—
Extract 14.
^ TT^tw i fa^TH: ^cTCcTT^-
so N
WSTTrfsfT^ I WcT I
f^^lf^^?! f^TftTrT: II
I WHcTcT I f^PJ^T ^rfcf I ^Tfe
\ X
HTH ^TfrST^t IlfcRflfcT I ^ -fV
fat fa^far
^Wl^frT TTfcT^^ I
Exercise 47.
By whom was the ' Acquisition of Friends ' heard ? Having
heard the ' Acquisition of Friends,' what do the princes desire to
hear? What did Vislinusarmma here say ? To whom did
Vishnus'armma say this ? What was destroyed by a very mean
greedy jackal? Where is the city called Suvarnavati? Who
dwells there ? Why did the merchant, though his wealth was
abundant, think "yet further increase of wealth must be made"?
EXTRACT XXVIII.
67
Extract 15.
?frT ^IRR: wN^Ff^^HRT^ ft
TW WX f^fRl ST**t ^TT^T^^Tn^T ^Tftl^H
t -o C\ t,
sfrnRlt nf?r ^f^Trr: i ^ ^rtt^
ttitot s^rNsfit farther: i iR^ft^T
qro ^T^fxr ijR^ro ^t ^W^T ^ I rTcft
n^tH cTRI-
wrT f^^T^t I
Exercise 4'8.
Why did Varddhamana set out towards Caschmere ? Having
filled his cart with various goods, and having yoked two bullocks
to the pole, who set out towards Caschmere ? Why did the bullock
Sanjivaka fall ? Having abandoned the bullock, what did the
merchant do ? What was then done by the bullock ? As the
days went on, how did the bullock become fat and sleek in body ?
What did the bullock then do ?
Extract 16.
cTWn^T TTT^foRiftFn ^T^
TTR^T f^ftr^fTOT^t^T fWfrJ'- I cRT-
60
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
I rrorfetv ^JRSfi: WWf I
^^fcTS^ I ^ I f*^ TO
H^T^T j^N H I rfcT "faiTO I
^(Tt TT^T
, Exercise 49.
Where did the lion, Pingalaka, go to drink water ? Why did
he do so ? What was then heard by the lion ? Having heard
that great sound, what did the lion do ? Who remained silently,
thinking " What is this " ? By whom was the lion, in that con-
dition, seen ? What did Damanaka then say? Who said, "Not
with my consent is even this service performed " ? Whose service?
Why is the service of the lion not, with his own consent, per-
formed by the jackal Karataka?
In illustration of the danger of being officious in serving a
superior, Karataka tells the following story :—
Extract 17.
i H^^t s^Tftn ft crai ^tt:
Ufa?: I rT^T HTf^ TTtHt I
vfa?: I rT ^R^^Wt^T ^RHTf I H^TT ^
^TTTTTT: I fTr[ fafafcT F^i: ^ ^T ^f
I ffd ^T I fa^TOTO fefT FTOT
^ ^T^T I FR^ ^T^TTffl 'JfT^T Sfittfa I
EXTRACT XXVIII.
61
W TTOTfTI^R TT^T^T: I fcRT f^VU^^R
^TTfa^rr -Hlftf^J H^T^T vrcfor I rTrft if*:
i ^T: n: ^nfTT^fiT^rf^r
I *RcT I Wfnft CRT
^ara I ^WfiT H ^TrfN f^lt ^cTCR I rTrT:
\ < s© 6 ^
T^W^T f^FRTT^J ITf^t f^^Tf^TTt^tm^TR
cTT^TTTTO I cTcT^R
^r? TTrT: I
Exercise 50.
Who entered the house of the washerman, and for what
purpose ? Who stands bound in the courtyard of the washer-
man ? Whom did the donkey address, having beheld the thief P
What did the donkey say to the dog ? What does the dog (in
reply) say? Who said "Thou thyself knowest how I perforin
the washerman's house-watching " ? Who is now neglectful in
the bestowal of food ? Without what do masters become de-
ficient in respect towards their attendants ? What does the
donkey do in order that the master may awake ? Who made
an excessive screeching ? What does the washerman, awakened
by that screeching, do ?
The jackal, Damanaka (—himself no paragon of virtue—),
shocked at the principles enunciated by his brother, Karataka,
resolves to wait upon the king, and attempt to discover the
cause of his disquietude.
Extract 18.
rTcfr ^JR^t fafTOT fq^^Tftii TR: I
^CT^T TTsJT ST^t irefsTcl^ STCTlj XTO-
^irfere: i ^T^TTf i fxRT^rr i ^n^f wir i
62
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
rT^rrfxi ITTW^ STfewre^
Exercise 51.
How did the jackal, Damanaka, go to the lion, Pingalaka?
Was the jackal seen by the lion or not ? What did the king
then say ? Has the king any occasion for a servant ? If the
king has no occasion for a servant, then what is the use of
Damanaka's coming ? What does the jackal say here (—or
in regard to this point) ? When must attendance necessarily
be mnde by a retainer P By whom must attendance necessarily
be made when the time (or a fit occasion) has arrived ? By
whom was this assertion made? To whom was this assertion
made by the jackal ?
The lion-king and Damanaka, the jackal, have a long conver-
sation, and Damanaka gets into great favour at court. But he
thereupon becomes about as selfish as his brother; and, on his
return from his audience, he narrates a story with much the
same moral as that which his brother had narrated. It here
follows.
Extract 18.
Kfq^fi: I f^f: ^SRTO TOT
cs c\ -a q
Sfifa
f^R -few^ I cfiTt srm tt^T^^WTTT f^ST^T
fTcTST^TT^jfa^ ^fl^f fawfo I fa^T
^ ^ftfcT ! ^feifS^ trj ^ ^QtfcT
EXTRACT XXVIII. 71
cT^T rT^T sf^R cT U^lM TJTST^R^R^ tf^t-
i ^ Jjfw. ^m^flcTT
"RT^T^ UTSt *TTOTf?5T: I ^FRTt * f^fr
^TcT f^TvTOTIR^R ^T^Tt ^^ II
Exercise 52.
Who nibbles the ends of the mane of the lion sleeping in the
cave of the mountain ? What did the lion think, having per-
ceived the ends of his mane nibbled ? Not catching the mouse,
which had gone into its hole, is the lion angry or not ? Having
gone to the village, what does the lion do ? Does the mouse
then, for fear of the cat, come out ? How does the lion sleep,
when his hairs are not injured ? Whenever the lion hears the
sound of the mouse then what does he do ? Why does the
mouse, on one occasion, come out ? Coming out, by whom is
the mouse caught P And further, when the lion never heard
the sound of the mouse then what did he do ?
Damanaka, however, sticks to his plan of acting towards the
king as loyally as he conveniently can,—due regard being had
to his own interests ;—and at his next audience he finds occa-
sion to tell the king the following story ?
Extract 19.
•fansft WT^WT ^rm v^w- irf^racftfh srirt^:
^^ i ucfiHT WTTT^to H^tpotr:
cs
aniNl "aTTmf^rr: I creuf^facTT WT TRt:
HTHT I ^ TRTl^TT TT^fer I rTcTT
^Tf^cTt Ilfcl^j WRI^
64
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
^RR I ^iftlcTt ^T^fa
CV vO N
Wl^ ^fiT ^f ^FftTrT T^TT-
farTT: I cTrT: TOvRTT ^TH ^^T
t v
wi fw^ TT^TT f^^Tfcrcr: I ^
TTTfa I rTcTT W rft^ rTW ^ I
TftTC^T^n^TO ^R nfm WRTT^fffatTfa I rTcTT
WT vfr.^^ ^TT^T: ^t^T i ^re
V\ N
Exercise 53.
Where does the demon Ghantaknrna dwell ? What popular
rumour is heard in the city called Brahmapura ? Having seized
a bell, who, fleeing, was killed by a tiger ? By whom was the
bell, fallen from his hand, found ? Who then rings that bell
every moment ? By whom was the man seen eaten ? And
what is heard every moment ? All the people, having said
what, fled from the city ? By whom, having discerned the
state of the case, was the king counselled ? Who said, " I will
settle this demon, Ghantakarna " ? To the old woman what was
given by the king well-pleased ? By the old woman what was
then done ? Having seen the fruits, what was done by the
monkeys ? Having picked up the bell, what did the old woman
become ?
Eventually the jackals, claiming much credit for their diplo-
macy, introduce the bullock to the lion, who takes a great
liking to him. Thereupon, naturally, the jackals become
envious, and the 'Separation of the Friends,' the business of
Book Second, is entered upon.
EXTRACT XXVIII.
73
Extract 20.
cT^Tf ^TT^: I feSTR f^RJ* I ^TT^Tf rft
I ^Rf^ ^rt qf^R^W^rNHH I ^R-
f rrt ^ ^ f^nFTO^RT^ I 1
W qrrflrf cT^T
H^t '"fa I W^t ^ I ^TC^f fchnH^H-
^ ^f3!^: ^"facf ^r^i' i ^ra
^Tf I ^qRfa^^Tfa: i
rRT^TRW I
^RT^R ff ^^^T ^ rf^^T qiraH: I
C\ O \
H^frT l ^mcR i ^R^fi: I ^tt-
V ^
f^cT rfCt ftRScT: I (R^R^ITfa
clW^TTfWcf^^R^ ^if^TTfrT I cTrT:
sR I ^R ^RcT ^SR-
cs \ n c
STR^R^t: ^Tf^^fq ^ I ^TcT: I
wrcNr ^T^t fsj^r ii
Exercise 54.
" What is to be done here ?"—who says that ? By whom
was said, " This is a fault committed by myself" V Where the
fault is one's own doing, is complaint proper or not ? Where
i3 lamentation improper ? Having reflected for a moment, what
does Damanaka say ? How is it possible to divide (or estrange
74 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
from one another) those of whom there is a great natural affec-
tion ? Who says—"An expedient is to be thought of" ? Is
all that possible by menus of force, which is possible by means
of expedients ? Who killed a black snake by means of a golden
necklace ? Where do the crow and his mate dwell ? By whom
were the crow's young one's eaten ? Why does the female crow
say—" My lord, let this tree be quitted " ? Is there any doubt
that dwelling in a house where there are snakes, is death simply ?
What-like is a servant who gives (pert) answers ? What else
(besides these, is entitled to be called) death simply ?
Extract 21.
^TTKTt ^ » fJTC * WfrRlfT I Tft mt T^cTO
Cs N
ITfTTOV: I tR^ I ^TWT^
"ST^rm STf H^FT fsp^facT
v \
i ^rreFT ^ i f^RT i i
C\
3 v9 \
^ f^fr fTTTnf^rr: II
^TO^Tf I ^^mcTcf I Ti^w: ^^frT I
Exercise 55.
Who says—" My dear (wife), it is not to be feared ? Whose
great ofFence had been again and again borne by the crow ?
Is the black snake again to be forgiven ? Is the crow able to
contend with a powerful black snake, or not ? " Enough, (or
have done) with this anxiety "—by whom was this said ? If
strength belongs to him who has intellect, then whence (should
be) any strengh of the unintelligent ? What sort of lion was
killed by the rabbit? Of the
very headstrong lion, killed by
the rabbit, by whom was the story told ?
EXTRACT XXVIII.
75
Extract 22.
sf^r TT^f f^m i ?rcT: ^f: trf^-
| cR^ H^TfTTT^ XT^^^^i -q^^^T^-
Hm' I ftrl^r^H I ^RcTT cTff ^cT I
rTcTiWfcT TT^Hli^ XT^RUcfif^q^ H^^RTCT I
^ ^Tf^T Mft f^TSTSfiFT Trnr: I
cTcT: *rr I ^wirfrff^fh^cT fsfiiR
cTTW I xj^rT ^ftTOTfiR Ofi fflfFFTO^ 3 II
Tj^TT^^Tftr I cTrr: ftft ^TOnftflcr:
sfitmrT cTWRr I ^^ fTO^PTtft I WffT
^ftcT I ^TTf^TO^: irfa f^fT^^T ^^TT^rT: I
^ C
cTRTO TTOPTJRFI *nr"f 3JPTT ^TTfM fH^f^T-
vD d.
rTH^TTT^ I
Exercise 56.
In what mountain does the lion, named Durdanta, live ? Who
remains always, in the mountain named Mandara, perpetrating
the slaughter of the beasts P Having made a meeting, what
was done by all the beasts ? " My lord,—why is the slaughter
of all the beasts made ?"—by whom was this asked ? Who (will
undertake to) supply a separate beast daily for the food of the
lion ? " If such be the choice of you, Sirs, then be it so,"—by
whom was this said ? And to whom was this said ? Thence-
forward who continues eating each day the beast assigned ? Of
whom, on one occasion, did the turn (to be eaten) arrive ?
Having seen his own turn arrived, what did the old rabbit
68
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
think ? By him who has hopes of life, (in respect) of whom is
submissiveness made (or shown)? "What have I to do with
conciliating the lion?"—by whom was this said? Who will
here go to destruction (—a resolution into the five elements,
earth, water, air, fire, ether—)? Who approaches the lion
very leisurely ? What did the lion say to him ? Did the
lion, pained with hunger, address him with anger, or not ?
What did the rabbit say ?
Extract 23.
: I TrTT HT ^sfa
frrefrT I cTcT: ^l^T^flTftWHcT: I
^pni^iTWT ^TTTfterfiT cTf^ ^^
vj) \ ov
TTfrTf^t ^fttcRR I cTcTT ^qT^TTrreT^ft^C
^W^T Orf^TJT ^r* JTCT: I TOt ^tf*
^rfWFT Wf^ I ^TOft I ^cT I sfit^cTT
â– 9 ^ Cs
wfi i i fire ^rrere stfa it^r:
ScTcTTSTR^T wfh I crf^ H^ft cr^T^wfrrT
C\ <4 i. ^
^ifarT CTf^ PHW ^TTcT Ufa? TT^^
TR^T cT^TfacR I ^ ^^^T^Wrelr:
v® ^ C\ s© C
v.5 c x
^TcTf -i srftftr i ^xn^^r ff ^wftreiTf^ i w^i
^TTf i rr^T ^-^TR: ^ ^ fw: I
Exercise 57.
How (or in what mood of mind) did the lion sav, " Having
' ©
gone quickly, sliow me where that base-souled one abides"?
EXTRACT XXVIII.
69
Having taken the lion, near what did the rabbit come ? Having
come there, what does the rabbit say ? In the water of the
well, what did the rabbit point out ? Then how did the lion go
to destruction ? Having heard this, what does the female crow
say ? " Tell thou what is to be done,"—by whom was this
* said ? Who bathes in the neighbouring lake ? From whose
person was a golden chain put off, at the time of bathing ?
Having seized the gold chain in her beak, where shall the female
crow place it ? Having placed the gold chain upon what—did
the prince go in to bathe ? Then by whom was that accom-
plished (which had been directed by the crow) ? Bv whom
was the black snake killed ? " May thy paths be prosperous !"
-by whom was this said, and to whom ?
Damanaka goes to Pingalaka and succeeds in raising sus-
picions of intended treachery on the part of the ox—whereupon
the lion kills the blameless bullock ; and thus is effected ' The
Separation of Friends.1 We proceed to
THE THIRD BOOK, ON WAR.
Extract 24.
"EFT: TT^tfl^OT I THfCRT
^rc ^cf ^rjf^mf^r i fN^spnwfcrre i
H^T rTnfiwfa I f^TCf: ^TcTT WT-
fwr^T ^Tf^rTT: i^TT: efifli: t^Trnf^f^T n
Exercise 58.
Of whom is it a pleasure to hear of war? By whom was
this said ? At what time was this said ? What did Vishnu-
£arma then say ? " Just what is relished by you, Sirs, that
I relate,1'—by whom was this said ? " Let war be heard,"—by
70
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
whom was this s:iid ? To whom was it said ? By whom, having
stayed in the abode of the enemy, were the swans deceived ?
Having trusted whom—were the swans deceived P What sort
of war was that of the peacocks with the swans P
Extract 25.
^fer ^R^Tcfft ^frTttr^^TUT STT^ft-
rT^: I FR fMflfrT^^ti ^f^W- IpR W^fftl
VRTSRflfcft ^fe^t I rfcTt ^WIT^
^f^TcTT^ ^cTTfTTT ^m-R-RWt^l xrf^fiq^-
^ I >Tf TRIT: ^cTT* I
^Wfaf^fHrTT ^l^T^^TTT^TfH^f: I
C
^rr^Rf^Tm: frr: ^wr 1
^rfa xrro: xnf^cTTfa II
Exercise 59.
On what part (—in what place—) of the mountain was the
large silk-cotton tree P Even at what time do the birds dwell
there with comfort ? In the hollow of the nests formed there,
who dwell comfortably ? What sort of shower at that time
took place ? With what was the face (—surface—) of the sky
overspread P Who then stood, pained by the cold, at the foot
of that tree P Having beheld the monkeys shivering, what was
EXTRACT XXVIII.
71
said by the birds ? How were the nests of the birds con-
structed ? Are the birds possessed of hands, &c. ? Who are
possessed of hands, &c. ? Having heard the speech of the
birds, what was thought by the monkeys ? Whom do the birds
blame ? " Let there only be a cessation of the rain "—by whom
was this said ? By the monkeys, having ascended the tree,
what was done ?
Extract 26.
^RTOT^W fa*TfcTcT: I "RTcT-
TW^ *TrRcT fl'^i f^TcT- I ^ ^ftHTTTC^TT-
C
frRT ^T^TTO Tlfer^: I cRTT ^R
^MT^TR ^^^re^U^T^RT^ I
YTr^T^^ I H^FT^TT ^R^cRT
TTTT I cT^STRWT ^TC^T^T
^T^TT: ^fiW I ^FTT^TT^ ct f^fa^TCR^^ff^
^T^TtmcT itcf^: i ^T^TWIT ^ S^R^T
^H^n ^ rf^TTfa^ rT^T cTcT#?r
^TfrrfHU^^TTfy^T tflfacT* I
Exercise 60.
Who fell into the indigo-vat ? Being unable to get up
(—out—) again, what was done by the jackal ? Who remained,
having shown himself as one dead P In the morning what was
done by the owner of the indigo-vat ? What was then done by
72
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
the jackal ? Who, having gone to the forest, said, " I am now
of the finest colour"? What else was said by the jackal?
(According to his own account) by whom, and by means of what,
was the jackal inaugurated in the empire of the forest ? " Let
the jackals behold my colour!"—by whom was this said? What
therefore (—according to the jackal—) is to be done, from
this clay forward ? Having made obeisance with a prostration
of the eight members of the body, what did the jackals say ?
Why did the jackals say this ? Of whom, over all the inhabi-
tants of the forest, did the sovereignty become (established) ?
His superiority having been established, by whom was the
jackal surrounded (or attended) ?
* Extract 27.
vTR^rr^r ^rt^W^ CTT: ^TCR: I
f^w^r wTT^TRre^m ^wrr^ ^fcr^T-
cT*T I *TT f^nfterT ^^T^VfalR ^R WR^T:
"TfajrTT: I rPEfWT ^ TOlfcT rPTRT f^M^TT I ?T(Tf
^ ^nTn^t ^HT^fan^^rT I TT-
tt^I^ i rT^f^T^ TrfHfa^r I
^R-RH^T ^rfWT I cTcT^t ^J^T^ ^TRTcT
^TTfq I I
1 ^HT^t ff TO FITcT rT^TTBT ^f^ST*: I
^T ^ TT^TT fa ^T II
rTrT: TO l^T^: I rRT
^rr II
EXTRACT XXVIII.
73
Exercise 61.
By whom were lions, tigers, and other pre-eminent courtiers
obtained? By the jackal—having done what? Again—having
done what P What was then promised by an old jackal ? By an
old jackal—having beheld what—was this promised P By what
were the tigers, &c. deceived ? Not having known what—do
they (the tigers, &c.) suppose this (one) a king? In order that
this may be understood, what is to be done ? Having heard the
voice of the jackals, what was done by the jackal ? It having
been thus carried out, what took place ?
Extract 28.
c-
fVcT: I rfrf: ^ftTTTtnxrr ^ra c^^TT H^RcT
TWT^^T W^f^?: I i^RST UTrfT^ ^TT ^H-fanTT
^r^TfT f^THrf I rTrTt
^iRFTcT frrcjsfi WT^ XT^-ftr rf fa^T
^R^T ffa^fs I rTcTt fam: rfc^UTcT
Cn ss
^fa I cT^^rt I cTrr: ^TR-
\
=2TfT Orfv^T^^W^: I cT^fTTO^ fsfi ^ TOftf 1
rTrnwfrT ^ ^Tf^rT nfrT^ cRTf^^pf^T:
I TJ^T cT^IT TTT^r fa^fit
U^PT^WTfecT: XT^ TTCT: II
sO
74
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
Exercise 62.
By the Kshatriya, named Chudamani, in the city (of) Ayodhya,
what vision was obtained in a dream ? With club in hand, and
having done what, does the Kshatriya stand at the door of his
own house ? Whom shall the Kshatriya pitilessly kill by a blow
of the club ? Struck by the club, what does the beggar instantly
become? Having witnessed all that, what was thought by the
barber ? " Hallo ! This is the way to gain treasure !"—by whom
was this said ? Why then does he not do the same ? Thence-
forth what does that barber do ? By whom, on one occasion,
was a beggar killed ?
The Fourth and concluding book of the Hitopadesa is devoted
to the subject of ' Peace.' It opens as follows :—
Extract 29.
WT I sfclWTfatftWT I
Wfai: I
â– RffcT SWT* TTsfrfttfrW^: I
^iTTWTf rprasfiTwri ^TT sfc?: ^icT: TOW II
v \
Exercise 63.
War having been heard, what is now to be told ? When was
this said, and by whom ? Who gives an account of peace also ?
A great battle having taken place, what was then done ? By
whom was peace made on the moment ?
From Book Fourth we select two stories, one of which, if the
reader has read the Arabian Nights' Entertainments, may re-
mind him of Alnascar; while the other is the Indian original of
the pathetic Welsh ballad of "Beth Gellert." The Hitopades'a
—itself a compilation—) is interesting as being the ancient store-
EXTRACT XXVIII.
83
house of Apologue—the store-house on which hundreds of sub-
sequent writers have indented, with or without acknowledgment,
—usually without.
Extract 30.
^^fT^n ^TC^CR: WT^r: I cTCTCCTTTT^RTST
^T^^^WITTqsfaWTOT W- I
cv .n
cTcT: ^TTT^RTf^PTtJ I ^RJffiR
TT?=r: TJ^: mRwf^cfiTTtTsfifa f^fa
^ s®
cR^TTO tj^ffa UT ^prhpRcft crermfw^TT
^ftfrr i cT^Rrt ^T^M ^
^ vt)
cTTS'ftwfa I ^fa^TR ufks: "SjWi^-
TT^l^f^m ^'RT'fa I rfrfT H^IW-
TSTT^r^T^T ^pf^R^T I^f ^T ^J^fw^-
fl'.^cT: II
Exercise 64.
By whom was a platter-full of meal found ? By him who found
the platter-full of meal what was done ? Why did the Brahman
lie down to sleep ? What was then thought by the Brahman ?
" I will beat all the rival wives with a club," — by whom was
this said ? On the hearing of the sound of the broken vessels,
what was then done by the potter ?
76
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
Extract 31.
^T^T^W'q crT^TOHWrGT Wt IcTT I WV
WT^nOFl ^ xntrn^Tt ^TrTRFmt 3R: I rf
qp WT^RI: Sfsr^jgn^farepi^ i ^ ^t ^
iwfa rT^j ^ftg^T^ sTfterfa i fVnjtw^
SfiT cTrT fNi ^ftftr I ^TcT I fVw^T-
^ifrr I rT^T ^rTT *TcT: I cTcl^R ^^ TTvRi-
fR^STR^ cT^ft' ^tUT^tjf oETTOTf^cT: I
vg
WT^l^T WO^tprrfa I rRTT
rT^Tfav Sf T Wt ^ Hf^rT
^fa^t (T I ^R^t ^T^Wr^
TTSTifrr ^T^WT^mT^^'- ^rfafa fltfer
mf^Tf^T^frT I cRT ^T^^t f^TC^RcT: II
Exercise 65.
Having appointed whom to guard the child, did the Brahman
woman go to bathe? Why did the Brahman reflect, " If I do
not go quickly, then some other one will obtain this wealth"?
In the absence of the Brahman, who is the protector of the child?
By whom was the black-snake* killed ?
* The black-snake," like tLe "black-bird," lias (—as denoted by the com-
pound word—) a special and restricted meaning-. As the "black-bird " is only
the songster, and not the crow,—so the "black-snake" is the deadly "Cobra
Capello," and no other black-cnloured serpent.
ABBREVIATIONS USED
IN THE VOCABULARY.
ins., instrumental, or 3d case.
(Nos. 50, 113, 115, and 116.)
loc., locative, or 7th case. (Nos.
113, &e.)
da., dual. (Nos. 104 and 106.)
tr'., crude or uninflected state.
(No. 1, p. 3).
s., substantive.
vb. verb.
par., parasmai-pada. (This is the
technical name of the tensgr_
affixes, of the active voice,
exhibited under No. 118. For
an explanation of the name,
see under dtm. — here fol-
lowing.)
at^^Lm_ane-pada. (No. 91. Pu-
rasmai-pada means ' an ex-
pression for another,' and
utmane-pada means ' an ex-
pression for one's self'. The
dtm. affixes are therefore
analagous to those of__the
Greek Middle^ They are
exhibited in the Vocabulary
under the word brute.)
Cn '
cl., class or conjugation. (Nos.
15, 93, and 96—103.)
caus., causal form. This form is
very similar to that of the
10th cl. (See No. 103.)
agt„ agent, noun of agency, or
verbal adjective.
pot., potential. (No. 133.)
ind. pret. part., indeclinable pre-
terite participle, or conjunc-
tive participle. (See No. 59,
and also, in the Vocabulary,
under the word 'SR^tTI
avalolcya).
rt„ verbal root. (No. 13.)
Dwan., Dwandwa compound. (Nos.
104, 105.)
Bahu., Bahuvrihi compound. (No.
107.)
Tat., Tatpurusha compound. (No.
108.)
Karm., Iiarmadhdraya compound
(No. 69.)
VOCABULARY, SANSKRIT AND ENGLISH.
SHohMM 1st per. sin. 1st pret. nf the
iib. 8th cl. par. Do, make.
"H =HlH 3c? pers. sin.
^rajTT pass. part, {of the vb. TiJTJT,
Kill, injure, with ^T priv.) Un-
injured.
•ai^JHJ nom. sin. m. of ^nsjH adj.
Unable.
>HTTH7T 3d pers. sin. 3d pret. of the
vb. iffi Isf cl. par. Go.
H3T s. n. The front, point, extremity.
"UT loc. hid. Before, in presence
^rcffiPnr 'id pers. siv. lsi prat, of
tnfct {causal form of the vb.
slay), He caused to be killed.
^T^5 s. n. A limb, member. The
body.
3d pers. sin. 1st pret. of
the vb. f*nr 10th cl. par.
Think, reflect.
'SlT^t s. f. The notched extremity of
a bow.
s. f. A wood, forest.
s. n. An egg. nom. or
acc. pi.
hid. From this. Than this.
Hence, hereafter. On this account.
Wfa ind. Excessively, very much.
ind. Here.
^T^n: ind. Thereupon. In the
meanwhile.
an inceptive particle. After.
Then. Now. And. But.
pass. part, {of the vb. g^I see,
with ^ priv.) Unseen.
ind. Now, to day.
ind. Commencing1 to day,
from this day forwards.
^IV^T ind. Down, below.
snreniT ind. Below, at the bottom.
^fVcp: nom. sin. m. of adj. Exceed-
ing, more, additional.
^N^IMll pres. part, of the vb.
2d cl. dtm. Lie down,—with
^tfv, Inhabit.—HBI gen. sin. rn.
^IHHI ind. Now, at present.
^TfJrpJrT pass. part, {of the vb. Be,
with prep. *S«T and ^r) UDper-
ceived.
87
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
^HiUJR ind. Immediately,afterwards.
^^T ins. sing. f. of pron.
This.-»nft: gen. du. m.
^Ifclsl Impolitic, silly.
^TC^UJT ind. Every instant, con-
tinually.
^^tTSfflfr 3d pel's, sin. pres. (of the
vb. TH 1st cl. par. Go, with ^^T,
After) Follows.
nom. sin. n. adj. Improper.
^jTfSTTj: 3d pers. pi. 2d pret. par.
(iof the vb. Tiff Gn. with ^T^,
After ) They followed.
^fRjflf^T agt. A follower, dependant.
^HT^ s- m. Civility.
^rjH^rfk: ins. pi. m. By those en-
joying or experiencing.
^HIHTT pass. part. Experienced, felt.
^PTH^IrnH 3d pers. sin. imp. pass.
(No. 132, of the vb. >T, Be, with
No. 130.) Let it be enjoyed.
^TOU: nom. sin. s. in. Love, affec-
tion.
^THfVff loc. sin. n. Done, executed.
o
^T^n-ri^T fut. pass. part. (of the vb.
ST teith To be done, or ac-
v>
eomplished.
^TtTOTJff s. n. A following, a going-
after.
^trj^iVT ind. In many ways.
'5f«T»T ins. sin. m. or n.(of^IT pron.)
By or with this, him, or it.
^PfTT: ind. Inwardly, within.
^tHTT nom. or ace. sin. of 'SnJT s. n.
Interval, distance, difference. At
the end of a word it may be ren-
dered by Another; as ^T'flT,
Another country ; ^qptTT, Ano-
ther man.
^ra^TT pass. part. Gone within, in-
cluded in
^rftlch^ ind. Near,
^sffapr ind. One with another,
mutually.
TT1-! nom. sin. s. n. Offspring.
^tln^T acc. pi. qf^KHT.. Other.
^xtiTg rjdj. Culpable.
^TH^Tf^ nom. sin. Not seeing.
Nos. 125 and 38.
^T^HJT pers. sin. 1st. pret. (of
the vb. i.si cl. par.) I saw.
3d pers. sin. 1st pret. of the
vb 3 2d cl. par. Say, speak,
^rfwni ind. pret. part, (of the vb.
Vt, Hold, with "^fW.) Having
said, or called out.
^TfajTrfT nom. sin. it. Wished, ap-
proved.
'SfftPTl^ ind. Towards, facing,
^fafq^ jws.s. part, (o/' the vb. fa^r,
Sprinkle, with ^jfa, No 130.)
Sprinkled, anointed, inaugurated.
^fati^W inf. To inaugurate. (See
preceding word.)
^Tjft nom.. pi. m. „f This.
^ITtf acc. sin. m.
O \
VOCABULARY.
J 08
SFni novi. xiii. vi. of ^Tf, This,
â– ^nilltn s. f. Name of the capital of
Rama, Ayodhyd, the modem
Oude.-HIT loc. sin.
^TT^lT^Tf nom.sin.s.f A large forest,
^ift s. m. An enemy.
^TqW acc. sin. m. A thing, wealth,
meaning, ind. For, oil account of.
^Hj^fg; nom. sin. s. f. Tatp. In-
crease of wealth.
nom. sin. in. of (from,
the vh. ^H}, Ask), Asking, beg-
ging. ^jf^faT ins. s.
'StQjWPT -pres. part. (of the vb.
IsZ cl. dim. Gain, with priv.)
Not gaining, or getting hold of.
â– 2T55TT adj. Lazy.
^T^rTTfCcT pass. part, of Hlft (cans,
of the vb. K, Cross, with ^Pr),
Taken off, laid down, or aside.
^â– srfrTffff 3d pers. sin. pres. of the vb.
HI lii cl. dim. (No. 38), Stand
off, keep aloof.
^^TT 3c? pers. sin. li< pret. of the
cb. ^ lsf. cl. par. Say.
^^vHtK pass. part, (of the vb. ^f?-
\rk 10th cl.) Despised, disre-
garded. ind. pret. part.
^Hc^W-MTniT 'Ad pers. sin. 2d pret.
(No. 55, of the vb. \Qth cl.
par. Look, see. with "SR1), lie
looked down upon. [It is to be
observed that all verbs of the 10th
cl., and, among others, all deri-
vative verbs, such as causals, &c.,
take a compound form of the 2d
pret. In this compound tense the
radical verb is combined with the
2d pret. of the auxiliary 'SIW, 'to
be,' H, 'to become,' or «F, ' to
make,'—the syllable ^TR being
interposed between the radical verb
and the auxiliary.] ^t^^lfoRii: n.
sin. m. pass. part. Seen, beheld.
^SRcjfaiT ind. pret. part. Having
seen, or looked down upon. [The
indeclinable preterite, or conjunc-
tive, participle, No. 60, ends in
ya, instead of f^T twa, when
the verb is a compound, or is pre-
ceded by a preposition.]
Inevitable. ^PHpf? ind. In-
evitably.
^H^mI^m 2d pers. pi. pres. of the vb
Sink, with "ST^T, Yield, sink,
give way.
^PTWl^ ins. sin. n. A staying, re-
siding.
^T^WPil ind. pret. part, of W'fl
(cans, of the vb. in, Stand, with
Having fixed, placed, set,
or put.
^fWTHH acc. pi. rn. Engaged in,
prosecuting.
Stfa^lTi ind. v>-o* part, of ^ift
(cans, of the vt). ^T, Go, with ft
89
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
and V TM'/r.) Not having delibe-
rated, without due-deliberation.
SPSITfa 'id pers. sin. 3d pret. pass,
of the vb. Hear.
J sa'
^HrTjJTTiT s. m. Prostration, as in re-
verence (—a falling on the eight
members or parts of the body, viz.,
the hands, breast, forehead, &c.)
110m. sin. in. Unable.
^TtprfajJI ind. pret. part. (of the vb.
^BJ, See, with Completely,
and priv.) Not having- well
inspected. ^mjflvyiohlPuu: gen.
sin. in. Acting- without circum-
spection.
•^rerpPTTt nom. pi. m. of ^r^nv^t adj.
Destitute of means, materials, or
instruments.
2d pers. sin. pres. of 2d
d. par. Be. (No. 93.)
vom. tin. m. f. of , He,
she, that.
*sfljr 3d p. s. pres. (of '31*1 2d d.
par. Be), There is, it is. ^rer 3d
pers. sin. imp. Let there be,
be it.
Iffl^ crude fo'-vi of the pers. pron.
I, (No. 81,) used only in compo-
sition, implying, My, mine, our.
^ffpTTT lor. sin. m. or n. of 37TJT.
This. 'iHW dat. sin. m. ^H (tin.
sin m. or n.
nom. sin of , I. (No. 81.)
^SvT? inter]. Aha I
^ inter]. Ah ! Oh ! Alas!
a.
^tT prep. To, at, as far as, until.
When prefixed to a noun, it go-
verns the abl. or ace- case. Pre-
fixed to verbs denoting Giving
and Going, it imparts to them,
the sense of Taking and Coming.
(No. 130).
WlWiPi ind. pret.part, (ofc&h, Hear
with prep. Wl), Having heard, 01
listened to.
''Srnsfaij pass. part. (of Scatter,
with pi'ep. Scattered.
^JTolicSt nom. sin. to. adj. Affected
o
distressed.
'StT^fcJH pass. part, (rif with
^HT), Agitated, distressed.
pass. part, (of ^re, Draw,
with ^t), Drawn, attracted, lured,
^nj s. m. A rat, or a" mouse.
^TPTiTt nom. sin. pass. part, {of 1TT,
Go, with ^T, No. 130), Come,
arrived. ^rPTiT indprv.Ljpar}.
Having come. (See Nos. 59 and
60, and also, in the vocabulary,
under the word ^^T^X^Havalohya.)
WT'imdlR imp. pass. Let there be
come (by so and so).
s.f. An order, command.
VOCABULARY.
J 08
'SnsTTTqffr 3d sin. of sUfl (caus. of
sn, Know, with No. 130),
Commandeth. T^TsTTq^fiT As
jour Majesty commands.
^rn»TT raowi.*i7t. o/'SITWH m. (No. 9),
Soul, self, spirit; acc. .
^T^: nom. pi. of ^Tlf^ s. m. A be-
ginning. In Bahuvrihi com-
pounds, it is conveniently trans-
lated by ' et cetera,' or, ' and the
rest'; as ^T^K TO: The gods,
Tndra, and the rest ; literally,
the gods, commencing with Indra.
^Il^T^t ind. pret. part, (of Give,
with ^IT, which see—as also un-
der Having taken.
s. m. A beginning, ^if^ and
also ^if^^PT ind. in compos. Et
cetera, the rest. See^lT^T'., above.
nom. sin. m. (rt. Qth cl.
Show, with ISt), Enjoined.
^TSTi nom. sin. m. First,
^nft^^ nom. sin. n. Pre-eminence.
â– ^ifWiqi* nom. sin. n. Sovereignty.
^ntflllT (rt. tUT, Blow, with ^IT
Inflated.
ins. sin. m. Brought, fetched.
(rt. Lead, with WT.)
acc. sin. of WJ^ .«■f Ca-
lamity.
^rmTtPT acc. sin. m. pres part, (if
rt. in ~d cl. }iar. Go, with 'ST,—
which see), Coming, approaching.
^STtTPI adj. Forest, wild, grown in
the forest.
^HTT>Mrt 11 , Let there be commenced.
(See No. 132, rt. w lsi cl. dtm.
Begin. Usually within prefixed.)
^raftm: (rt. T1V, Complete, with
"an), Conciliated,
^n^, Having mounted. ^TTCfRnom.
sin. to. pass. part. (No. 52.
rt.
^Tf, Afflicted, disturbed, (rt.
^itz}, Venerable, a friend.
^n^jVPw^, (It was) considered, seen
fit. ^n^tsiT, Having considered.
(rt. ^fN-, See.)
isn^nanj^ inst. du. By us two. (Nos.
81 and 123.)
^TRiT pass. part. (rt. Surround),
Surrounded, overspread. ^Hl^rf,
loc. sin. n- (N. B. The locative,
' absolute is analogous to the
' ablative absolute'' of the Latin.)
^n^M s.f Desire, hope,
'sn^j ind. Quickly, speedily.
iST^rir s- m. Dwelling, asylum, pro-
tection.
^ITW^i pass- part., (rt. Adhere),
Attached, fixed, intent on.
^HW^ pass, part- (rt. Go), Near,
adjacent.
3d sin- pres. (rt ^tra, Sit, be
present,-2d cl. atra.) He ia,
exists.
64 SANSKRIT FIR
wfann: nom. pi Stayed, dwelt
"3IT? sin. of ^n? defective verb,
Say. See a.
^Ti^K m. Food.
Having called, rt. (See
^H =1 C^l 4M •)
'SH^rT pass- part. Brought.
T3IT f. A desire.
They desire, (rt. in eg. ^
if. JT^fff, No. 38.)
^frT hid. Thus, to this effect, so :
saying. This particle is used
when the very words or thoughts
of another are given, answering
the purpose of the inverted com-
ma ; as oh|sQ(*|^ftTf(T spITfT (Be-
ing asked) 4 Who is there?' he
should say 'i.' (No. 90.)
nom. or acc. sin. n. This.
^{T, Here, in this world.
loc. sin. Here, now, at such
a time as this.
U
^T, A lord, master.
3 K.
SfiS pass. part. (rt. Spoken.
LESSONS.
(Nos. 53 and 95.) d^M-ifr, They
two said (indef. past. part. No.
126.)
TifiT, Having said. (No. 61.)
^fra ind. Up, aloud.
pres. part. Flying- (rt. ff,
Fly, 4th cl- atm., with Up.)
m. Superiority, elevation.
Highest, best.
Impertinent, giving (pert)
answers.
^fT nom- or ai.c. n- Answer, reply.
â– J^tT s. f The north. ^^m^T s.
v. The north, the northern road
or course,
df^a, Arise, get up. (rt. FT, Stand.)
HTOTiJH (No. 124), To get up.
TrVfltRlfa, I raise. caus.
with ^JiT, which always requires
the initial TT to be dropped.)
■^TWI ind. pret• pari. Having
lifted, or picked up.
"37*11*1, Having arisen. (See pre-
ceding word.)
'JfUfHTN' ins. sin. pass- part.(rt.iHT,
Fall, with TiT, Up), Springing up.
IrMitl, Having raised, accumulated,
(from Plf^ caus. of tj^, Go, with
•3TT, Up),
y f^jif, Having abandoned, (i t.
Create, with ^rf).
n. Water,
^ifiivif, Desirous of water.
VOCABULARY.
J 08
Mad. (rt. Be proud.)
^nfifgiH, Prepared, made, {from
rt. ^J, Be able).
^TTCFfa,Having bought, (rt. 'aft, Buy.)
^â– "JTSfl m. Waste, loss.
^HJItsAITh, I go near. (rt. 7T*T, Go,
No. 38.) ^imr pass. part. (No.
52.) d'lJJIHf ind. pret. part.
"^^^oRITHC, We (will) make respect-
ful offering. (A nominal verb
from â– g'lrft ohr|, A respectful of-
fering or present.)
â– JTTHJoRT,/. Land lying at the foot of
a mountain ; a valley,-cfiTOlJT
loc. sin.
Do thou advise instruct, (i t.
f^l, 6th clâ– par. Point out).
m- Instruction, advice.
to. Need of, occasion for.
ind. Upon, above, up, aloft,
over. With.
^^f^ITr du. m. The two alighted,
or sat down. (rt. ftf^T, Enter.)
^TfPT m. Abatement, cessation.
Having gone near.
in. edge, outskirts.
in. Means, resource, device.
"jnf^flTJl'W pass.part. gen. pi. Ac-
quired, gained, (rt. Acquire.)
â– JUTUT f. Neglect, disdain.
He said, spoke to. (rt.
J/. No. 57.)'
11.
, They two said. (rt. q^.)
3a! pi. -2d pret. (-No. 55.)
5 e.
One, a, sole.
TT^i^T, One day, on a certain tiiiifc.
Tr^f^W ind. One by one.
'Jil^ nom. or acc. sin. n. oj CTR
This. acc. sin. m.
Also, truly, selfsame.
CT i Thus, so.
0.
"STtafV s f. An annual plant or herb.
iSl au.
WflV s. 11. Medicament, drug, herb
or mineral.
oR ha.
cSfpffH nom. or acc. sin. s. n- A
bracelet. (No. 7.)
m. The bank of a river.
m. A tortoise or turtle.
"SBTcF m. n. A camp, town, dwelling.
J^TjT acc. pi. of"SRVS s.m. An atom,
a grain, cjujj: ins. pi.
ofi^j oFVprfq ind. Somehow or other.
, How ?
i I tell. (rt. 10
93
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
par. Say, declare, relate.) efT^HfiT
3d pers. sin.
eF*n/. A story, tale, fable, narrative,
cjrsznr, Tt is told or declared.
/O3, 91-) • Let be told-
(No. 132.)
J^TfjTTT ind. On a certain lime, at
any time, ever.
^or m. Gold. s. n. Tat p.
A gold-cord.
m. or n. A cave, glen,
cirq^clf m. A small shell used as a
coin, a cowrie.
ofiTflin: nom.pl. of opfrff m. A pigeon.
cKWWJfT^ acc. pi. of pres. part, of
efiiT lsi cl. dtm. To tremble,
shake.
=RT7«ir m. The name of a certain
jackal.
«ti Wtl, To be made or done, {fut-
part, pass., No. 127, of See
No. 101.) ^
oh
csftT3T*f, You will do. ("2dfut., Nos.
28 and 118, of No. 101.)
^HtfCcjn f. A knife, or couteau de
chasse.
^f^Ijrm acc. sin. ubs. s-f. Suitable
/ measures.
(No. 127.)
offTT'C m. or n. Camphor,
cffc^f m- An earthern jar.
ins. sin. of ^ficjs?' m. Conten-
tion, strife.
Name of a district on the
Coromandel coast, extending from
below Cuttah to the vicinity of
Madras.
^fifW^K loc. sin. m. of fafew,
pron. A certain. (Nos. 86 and
8,.)
cn%: ins. pi. of oFIofi m- A crow.
^o^rnwiT ind. Like the crow,
tortoise, deer, and mouse.
im ^TO ^TrT , see Nos. 104
cv e o \
and 73.)
^T^fll^lHI^, Of the crow, and the
tortoise, and the rest. (gen. pi. m.,
see last word, and also under
â– ^TT^S f. A hen-crow.
m. The body. in. Tatp
Pain of body.
Having caused to be made
or done {ind. pret. part, of ^Ttfc
caus. oj ^T, No. 101.) ^BTfCTT pass,
part. (No. 52.)
■grrfCT agt. Making, a maker.—Jir:
nom. pi. m. or gen. sin.
pass. part. Proper to be
made or done. See eB^ftif.
<*lt$ m. Time. A name of the de-
stroying deity.
^T^T n. Poetry, a poem.
n. Cashmere.
f^if^iT nom. or accâ– n. Some, any
thing. (No. 86.) ind. Somewhat.
VOCABULARY.
J 08
ftw nom. or acc. sin. n. Who ?
which? what? ind. why? what!
whether. (No. 85. Obs. It is often
employed with the force merely
of a note of interrogation) When
^rfa is subjoined, it gives an in-
determinate sense,—thus, fafflfa,
Somewhat, some, any, any thing
soever.
ftw^JT ind. On what account ?
fsfifafiT ind. How so ? What's this?
fchH^tO f- Rumour, on dit.
fiPTiT adj. Some, a little. How long?
â– ^TSt rn. A dog.
o -J ^
â– ^nTH ind. Whence ? wherefore ?
o \
sflrftsfa, Somewhere or other. (See
under fofiH.)
n. Eagerness, joy, curiosity.
^fxiW. Angry, (pass. part, of ^nj.)
m. A jar m- A
potter.
^j^rT 2d pi. imp. of oR, Do, make.
«FWT1T pres. part, dim
op^t in. A species of grass used in
many religious observances, hence
called sacrificial g-rass. (Poa cy-
nosuroides.) Bmiuv.
With Kv'sa grass in hand.
n. Health, welfare.
vi
i?i. A well,
â– giwt m. A tortoise.
^JK, Made, done. (pass. part. No.
52, of No. 101.)
cSlTTR, He made. (No, 126.)
e ^ v
^FTT ind. For, on account of.
c
^iW adj. Black, or dark blue. ^SOt-
A black snake. (No. 69.)
ofi^Tf^T, By some one. (ins. sin. of
q. v.)
<=t>*lif^« By some one. (ins. sin■of
ftprfiT, qâ– v.)
in. A lion's mane,
cfife^ m. n. The hollow of a tree.
t^^JSS m. n. A bow.
cplH in. Anger.
m. Course, order, way.
n. The bosom, a cavity.
in. Pain, distress.
Hi, Where? whither?
^tHH. Instantly, (from 7J*!! to. A
moment,—the abl. being used ad-
verbially).
â– JSjf1?^ in- A soldier.
TiptT^, To be suffered, endured pa-
tiently. (fut. pass, part., No.
127, of -S5J*.)
•^krcm, Bahuv. Purified—(his sins
being wiped out when he has suf-
fered (he consequences of them).
TJTV1 /â– Hunger.
o d
in- A shaving (of the head).
^ITofiT^T it- The operation of
sharing.
kha.
I3fl!3rC, Broken, shivered, (rt.
95
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
©T^Tftl, I eat. (rt. cl. par.)
—^if^TT, pass. part.
13T f>i. A hoof. On three legs.
T
iT«at, Go thou. (No. -3?.) loc.
pi. n. pres. part. (No. 125. See
also under
'l4Utyl.ll, To Games a, the deity of
wisdom.
*TTT, Gone, went.
(No. 5J.)
irftrnnfH, I will go. (N'us. 28, 118,
and 121, rt. JR.)
*T»Tfa, Deep.
m. An ass.
m. The interior, or middle.
xTqF m. The throat,
jpi m. A vulture. ipr^giTWlT ins. dti.
Dwan. By the vulture and the crane.
(T^ n. A house, home. 'T^'CJT Tatp.
The guarding of a house.
'T^K pass- part. Take. (Nos.
102 and 53.) J^nn^, Let be
taken, or accepted. (No. 132.)
JVt^rrd /. The (river) Goddvari.
ifi n. Respectability, weight, im-
portance, respect,
y^mfa, He will collect, (rt.
see under Jptfa.)
m. A village, (in composition,
A multitude.)
V gha.
m. An earthen water-jar
Wt/. A bell.
TUPToS^ 5. vi. (Bell-ear) Name of a
supposed demon.
TPT vi. n. A cloud. TRTlfsfrT n. TvrP.
•The roar of a (thunder) cloud.
^ cha.
^ ind. And.
^f=R7T, Alarmed, (rt.
^ai m. The ruddy or Brahmany
goose (anas casarca).
^^T ins. sin- of A bird's beak
or bill. ^^fW'. ins. pi
n. The aggregate of four, a
quarternion.
^[HFTT/. The Chinndb (river in
the Punjaub).
vi. Whose crest-jewel
is the half-moon (a name of the
god Siva).
^TUT m. The foot.
nom. sin. m. of ^TrT pres.
part., No. 125, of ^T \st cl. pa>\
Go, also feed, graze.
Moves, goes. (■;•/. ^qJ.) pass,
part. Moved, went.
f^ir=niT >n. A scream, a bray.
fTW adj. Variegated, wonderful;
lovely. vi. Spotted 0r
streaked in the body.
VOCABULARY.
J 08
fanPTfit, He thinks, reflects, {rt.
fan ^ 10t/t cl. par.) —TTfvtT 3d
pi. f^RTTT pass. part. f-M*n«iliT
jut. pass. part.,
f. Thought, care
f'^^oFT^nf^rl, Cherished for a long
time. TATP.(ri!.1T$ 10th cl.par.)
^UT f. Top, summit, crest. ^TWftn
in. Tatp. A jewel in a crest or
diadem.
^rfinff, Smashed to pieces, (rt.
^iT ind. If. Although.
^FT f. Any bodily motion or gesture.
Action. ^ETfa^TO n. Tatp. The
observing of a person's actions,
^tr m. A thief.
â– <5 chha.
fgRflT, He cuts. (rt. fa? 7th cl.
par.) fsra pass. pari. m.
KaRM. A riven tree.
Bahuv. Whose bonds were cut.
I will cut.
»PT> A person. SPTTTTr? m. Tatp.
Rumour, report.
ST^pli, A jackal.
n. Water. afcSW;, m. A cloud
(water-holder). m. A
lake. nom• or acc.
sin. n. Another lake. siijU^Pl m.
A lake.
^Tllf^?, He awakes, (rt. Qd cl.
par.) sTTnTlftr cans. Thou dost
waken.
aTTTT pass. part. Born. (rt. jT^T, Be
born.) iTTrTfV'JTfl Baiiuv. Having
his confidence excited. jHHI'pi
Bahuv. Having one's anger roused.
â– Sn^SH nom. or acc. sin. n. A net.
jftfTiT n. Life. iftPTHT^n /â– Tatp.
Hope of life,
snfff, A kinsman. sTTrTCT: nom. pi.
ff ta-
Having heard that. (See No.
112.)
m. Rice. 'd^Jc^cWir m. Tatp.
A grain of rice.
TTfT ind. Therefore, so. Then.
THTff ind- (equivalent to itWW, No.
81.) Thence, from that. After-
wards. ITiT; wfir ind. Thence-
c
forward.
TTrttj+illrT ind. Instantly,
rl^ ind. There.
K'TT, So. rreif^V adj. Of such a sort,
or in such a plight.
H^HWS^W ins. n-Tatp. By the way,
or in the course, of following hirn.
rTJJTWir abl. sin. Tatp. From
\
amongst them.
97
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
7IH, Him. (No. 81.)
nom. sin. to. A tree. rtTtt yen-
TI^" loc. rf^T acc. pi. tTK*f loc.
pi. H^Hc? It. Tatp. The foot of
a tree.
crff covj. Then.
The lower part, bottom, foot.
â– ffftr^ loc. sin. m. or n. (of TI^,
No. 81.) He, she, it, that. rT^f
dat. sin. f rT^IT: abl. or yen.
sinâ– f
KITTPrre 3d sin. 2d pret. of ITS,
10th cl. par. Beat, castigate. HT-
iftlHI ind.pret. part. KTfeT 'pass,
part.
HTTrT ind. So far, so much. Just, at
s
least.
fHo5=S nx. A sectarial mark (made
on the forehead with coloured
earths).
frUjfiT, He stands, (rt.. ¥T lst cl.
par. See No. 38.)
•ft?; n. A shore, a bank'. itft loc.
TT ind. But.
o
FcTftraW loc. sin. m- Baiiuv. Of
equal prowess.
HIT pass. part. Pleased, (rt. WR 4th
cl. par.)
WHifi*T ind. Silently, softly.
rTTIT n. Grass.
t
K, They. (See rHT, No. 81.) Also
dat. or yen. sin. of y^tj, Thou.
1T»1, By him, or that.
W^TfTTK 'M sin. imp. pass. (No. 132)
of ?J>T ls< cl par. Abandon,
â– gtf n- in compos. A set of three; ax,
WH444, The three, worlds, i.e.,
Heaven, Earth, and Hell.
^Tra to. Fear, fright. ^iftnT, Fright-
ened. pnss. part, of ^nfa caus.
of vb. Fear.
Thou. (See No. 81.)
^ da-
adj Southern. ^fsjI^T s.f The
south. ^fiSfJffTiI n. The southern
road or course.
^^T, Having given. (3d cl. par. rt.
^T; see No. 61.)
^fv n. Curds. ^fVoK^ m. Curd-ear
(name of a certain cat).
-1 <*i, Name of a certain jackal.
nom. du. to. Dwandwa, Wife
and husband, a wedded pair.
to. Pride.
m- A mirror.
(f^T n. Sight, vision.
2d sin. imp. of ^flff caus. of
â– pj. See (No. 38) ^HW 3d sin.
imp. ^SjtPT nom. sin. pres. part.
(No. 125.) ^f^HT pass. part.
^f^hnn^T nom. sin. m. hulef.
pass. part. (No. 126). ^fai^l
ind. pret. part,
n. A gift. Liberality.
VOCABULARY.
J 08
n. Poverty.
f^'^sjd rf dwandwa. From quarters
and countries (comp. f^T + ^7!').
f^frejinT m. Tatp. The subjugation
of a country.
adj. Long. ind. n. Deeply,
Baiiuv. Making a long-con-
tinued noise, yelling, howling.
adj. Bad-souled, vile.
JJf adj. Difficult of access ; s. n. A
fort.
^^Tnf pass. part, of iJT, To tame
(with ^T prep. Difficult), Hard
to be tamed.
, Corrupt, bad.
adj. Far, distant. ^t^TT, Put
to a distance.
f. A stone or rock.
pass. part, of , See. 1T*T
Having seen.
f. The eye. Sight, a look.
TUn^ 7ii.. The favour of a look.
A god. A king (in poetical
language). ^IspTJ to. The city
of Vdna on the Coromandel coast,
in? n. The body.
m. A fault, defect, evil,
â– jaj n. A thing, substance : property,
wares, goods, chattels.
ind. Swiftly.
o v
l^J n. Strife.
STC f. A door. Sift loc. sin.
V dha.
V^lft? loc. sin. of VHtf n. A bow.
VT, Happy, fortunate.
vfWiT, He will place, (rt. V.)
VTCT/. The sharp edge (of a sword
or the like). VRTOTT! m. Tatp.
A heavy fall of rain.
VWHTH gen. pi. of VPTiT pres. part.
(No. 12o) of VT^r \st cl. par.
Run.
vfonnJT gen. pi. m. of VfacT , Wise.
VtT pass. part, of w, Hold, seize,
place.
^f na.
«T ind. No, not.
fj: acc. dat. or gen. pi. of f.
•T^qS m. An ichneumon or mun-
goose.
n. A city. T^Tt loc.
Vpft f. A river.
7pTi<^ 3d sin. Idpret. of Bellow,
roar.
n. The sky. TPT^^ it. Tatp.
The nether sky, the atmosphere.
^TCTfiT Tatp. A lord of men, a king.
â– ^f^TT pass. part, of 7f|, Roar, bellow.
s. n. A roar.
rl^fcT, He perishes, (rt. Trrjfj 4th
cl. par.)
ind. Many, various, sundry.
^IH nom. or acc. sin. of HIHH n.
99
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.^.*.• â–
A name (No. 9). ind. By name,
indeed. Often an emphatic par-
ticle.
tTWT n. A name. This word most
usually occurs as the last member
of a Sahuvrthi or adjectival
compound (No. 107).
HTTT nom. sin. m. ^ acc.
TITO loc.
fa^TJ adj. Tasteless.
TH PkJ Uf, Having thrown in. (rt. fief^T
6th cl. pur. Throw.)
f. Sleep. 'fa^Tl ins.
f^Vnt, Having placed, deposited, (rt.
VI, Hold.)
ffmfinr pass. part. Fallen down or
in. (rt. UK l.vi cl. par. Fall.)
frpiTfa
fawtT, Secret. fiTWH ind. Privately.
f«TT**I pass. part. Immersed. (rt.
6th cl par.)
fspnST, Having yoked, {rt. ijir lOi/t
cl. par.)
f^TT^t adj. Without hope, hopeless.
frrefliT pass.part. Investigated. Nar-
rated. {rt. lOi/t cl. par.) frf-
T^OWR 3d sin. imp. pass, frng-
â– nTHTJU pres. part. pass. Being
discovered.
fa^TT adj. Lonely (f?R, Without,
and »T«T, People).
frR^W ind. Unmercifully.
fHijtlJ adj. Senseless. ffT^^I^/tin. siru
o o
faS^i? ind. Excessively.
ffrff}K pass. part. Meted out, con-
structed. (rt. JTI, Measure.)
adj. Free from wind, sheltered.
,
firft^N adj. Same, like, having no
difference.
fa^iT adj. Happy, at ease.
fcpntfKj He dwells in. (rt.
Dwell.) ftr^TfnT M pi.
ffT^f^iT'T nom. sin. n. Word was
brought or sent. (rt. f^, Know,
^rf^ caus.)
f^'-ya, Motionless.
f«T5iI pass. j>art. Smitten, slain, (rt.
^Tf, Slay.) ftrfTre^pn: tjan. du.
â– m. Bahuv. Having their armies
slain, or greatly cut up.
m. A nest.
^Vti^l, Having conducted. Having
passed (a space of time), (rt uft,
Lead.)
adj. Black, or dark blue. .«. n.
Indigo (the dye). tft^cujj Bahuv.
Blue-coloured, The in-
digo-plant.
ind. Assuredly.
, A king.
C ' O
1 pa.
Hfw nom. pi. of. Trf^H , A bird.
Hf^fW: ins. pi.
VOCABULARY.
J 08
1'f} m. Mire, a slough. loc.
acc. sin. of tj^^ abs s. n.
(from Five), Death (i.e.
reduction to the state of the five
separate elements, of whose aggre-
gate the body consists).
m. n. Cloth, a web.
n. A heap or multitude. A coat-
ing or covering.—ins. pi.
tfffrff pass. part, of *T7T, Full.
TJWt f. A wife. Tr^lT ins.
Tjfsp^ m. A road, ttftt loc.
tj^ ii. The foot. Place, station. A
degree, step. Post, rank.
nom. pi. of Tftm , A road
or path.
WW 3d sin. 2cl pret. of TiT, Fall.
Tp; pronominal, Other. Extreme,
pre-eminent.
q<| JfiH m. Power, valour. Forcible
means.
qft^Nfl 3d sin. pres. pass. (No.
91), Is known or found out. (rt.
fsf, Collect.)
TrfTiR m. Followers, retinue.
pass-part. Quitted,abandoned.
qfomT ind. pret. part. (i t. W5T,
Quit.)
qfc^TH "• Complaint, lamentation.
qftWT, Despised.
TjfOJJR, Prowling, roaming. (No.
125, rt. HT cl. par. Whirl.)
qfraTC m. Retinue.
Tft^rT pass. part. Surrounded, at-
tended. (rt. W, Surround.)
â– RfcWit pass. part. Wearied, (rt.
TJTT, Be weary.)
in}£fTT ins. sin. in. of TtEfcTT, pres.
part. Prowling about, (rt. ,
Travel.)
MC5i<4ll«1 pres. part. Fleeing, (rt.
1st cl. dtm. Go, with tru,
Back, the T being changed to
T^lftnr pass- part.
q^T m. A beast. acc. pi. HJjffl:
ins. pi. q^PlTJT gen. pi.
tTUTTT ind. After, afterwards. Behind,
q^qrfa, I see. (rt. £31, No. 38.)
T^T 2d sin. imp. Behold.
Bahuv. Named Pa-
taliputra (a city, see No. 107,
supposed to be the ancient. I'a-
libothra and. the modern Patna).
TTlfttT to. The hand.
mfiTitpass.part. oj"mfif(raus. ofVlf,
Fall),
Made to fall, thrown down,
â– qr^ m. A foot.
MmIm n. Water (Jut. part, pass- of
IT, Drink, No. 127).
qivq, O traveller ! qir^PT ins.
qml^lrlj More, or very, wicked.
(compar. of TIT, Wicked).
TIT§'!J in. The general funeral cere-
mony, with double oblations to
the manes, at the Parva, or con-
junction of the sun and mooD-
|
Full Text |
PAGE 2
FIRST LESSONS IN SAN SI(RIT G RA1\IMAR, TOGETHE!t WITH AN INTRODUCTION TO THE HI TOP ADESA. DY JAMES R. BALLANTYNE, LL. D. LIDnAnIAN OF THE INDIA OFFlCE. SEVENTH EDITION. LONDON: KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & CO. V'P DRYDEN HOUSE, GERRARD STREET, W. 1908.
PAGE 3
The ri9ltts of tmnslatinn and nf rep,o,lnction are reseriecl.
PAGE 4
ADVERTISEMENT TO THE SBCONn EDITION. THI; little brochure which, as above indicated, I prepared, some eleven years ago, fo1 the use of my English pupils in the Benares College, has met with unexpected favour in England. At the instiga tion of teaclwrs and publishers, I reprint it, with the addition of " An Introduction to the Hitopa.de.~a ", the design of which Introduction is stated at page 47 ufthe present volume. I make a present of the edition to my worthy publisher, and I trust he will not suffer by accepting the risk of its publication. With a view to diminishing that risk, it may he a, well to anticipate a possible ( or aetual) question or two. "Can a book of this ki11d,"-It may be asked,-" preparc•d for Hindus, be a quite suitable book for learners in England?" I answer -" Yes :-if suital,le for the one class, it is suitable for the other." The mere studu::t~ of English, in the Gov,•rnment Colleges in India, have lost-as the bulk of English boy~ are not 110w required to have the power (-so remarkable in Hindu el,ildren--) .of learning by heart long strings of wo~ds and long s1ri11gs of rule•, not merely without explanation--but-without repugnancP. The Hindu student who has devoted himself (-as so many now do-) to the nearly exclusive study of English,-anrl, on the other hand, the English youth, stand therefore in much tl1e same position as regJ.:ds their entrance on the study of Sanskrit. "But are these ' First Lessuns' not intended to sedttce the learner into the study of the Kaumudi, and of the PaTJ,iniya grammatical system generally?" I reply by quoting, from the above Advertise ment to the Ffrst Edition, my anticipation that he who ~hould have gone through this introduction would not " be so readily repelled by a gram mar which starts from the driest elements of the subject,-like the grammar, of Profes,ors Wii,;on aud \Villiams ". " But are all the exerci~es in these ' First Lessons' ,-particularly !Le exercise8 for translation from English into l::ianskrit,-of progressive difficulty,-like those in the 'Sanskrit Manual' just published by the Boden Professor of Sanskrit?" I reply,-" Not so,-and intentionally not s.i." The Advertisement to the First Edition shows, I think, with snffici<;nt plainness, that my design is to tempt the ~tudent to enter on
PAGE 5
ADVERTISEMENT TO THE SECOND EDITION. t!te subject,-to lure him on to a Pisgah-prospect of the Land of Promise, -and thl'n to let him buckle manfully to the struggle if the prospect tempt him. This is a much humbler aim than that of the Boden Professor's "Sanskrit Manual"; but it is one which may, perhaps, not unadvisably precede it. How many persons, who would have been repelled by Archbishop Whately's "Synthetical Compendiurr.' of Logic, have been conciliated to the study by his delightful " Analyticdl Outline"! To the mere beginner it is not, in my opinion, advantageous that each successive step should be a harder step, and more uphill,as Milo's bull-calf proved heavier every day he carried him. The sixth Proposition of Euclid's " First Book" is a posiLi vely salutary relief after the pains and perils of the " Pons Asinorum ". A journey all uphill is less pleasant than one with alternations of ascent, descent, and occasional level; and further, it is not only less pleasant, but less profit able, to him whom the first hard climb provokes to turn back in disgust. In the preparation of ,he original brochure I was pleasantly aided by my coadjutor in the then recently established Anglo-Sa11skrit department of the Benares College-Professor Fitz-Edward Hall, D.C L., Oxon.~ who, being amused by the plan of the work, took a lively interest in its preparation. If this extended edition had undergone his critical revisio11, I should feel more confidence iu its faultlessness ;-but, such as it i~, Dr. Hall will not, I hope, disdain this dedication of it to him, as a memento of our joint labours, in happy bygone years, at Benares. J. R. B.
PAGE 6
ADVERTISEMENT TO THE FIRST EDITION. Tm-; opm10n has been adopted by the Government of the N. "\V, Provinces that the study of Sanskrit, by the English pupils in the Government Colleges, might be made to furnish a means of mental discipline analogous to that which the study of the Latin and the Greek furnishes in Europe. In these "First Lessons", the plan of which was suggested by Mr. T. K. Arnold's" First Latin Book", and which are intended to precede the study of any regular Sanskrit grammar, the etymological rules for the permutation of letters in the formation of words, which in the regular grammars the learner encounters at the outsf't, are remitted to a later division of the work,-attention being called at the outset to. those syntactical rules only-and to each rule only when a special occasion for it arises-which are of constant application in modifying the appear ance of perfect words when they come together in a sentence. Attention is also confined, in the first instance, to those forms, (such as the 3d person singular of the verb) in which the most constantly recuning words present themselves in sentences, and the pupil is set at once to write exercises, in which a number of useful words are repeated so frequently as to render unlikely their being readily forgotten again. The pupil, whilst making progress, will here probably have the pleasant feeling that he is making progress :-and, after mastering this intro, duction, he will nut be so readily repelled by a grammar which starts from the driest elements of the subject,-like the grammars of Pl'Ofossor;, Wilson and Williams, or the Laghu Kaumudi, with its English Version. If it should be thought that too little demand is here made upon the learner for the exertion of mental effort-the reply is this, that the main purpose of these exercises is not so much to provoke mental effort as to imprint on the memory of the learner some of the broadest outlines of a subject which, first presented in all its details, is apt to prove re pulsively bewildering. J. R. n.
PAGE 7
The Devanaga1'i Alphabet The crude fo1'1n of the N 01111 The Nominative case . The root of the Verb INDEX. PART I. The 3d person singular present Roots of the 1st conjugation 'l'he imprope1 diplttlwnrr, or [j1l1_ia substitutes of the vowels . Euphonic changes The 3d person singular 2d future The Aecumtive singular Changes of A nu swam The :"rominative plural The Accusative plural The Instrumental case The Indefinite past participle passive The 2d Preterite . 'fhe Tndeclinable, or Conjunctive, past participle Indeclinable words The Dative and Ablative cases . 'l'he Genitive and Locative cases :\djectivf:s and Karmadharaya compounds. Euphonic changes of the vowels Tatpurus!ta compounds Pronouns The conjunction iti The Passive voice . The Second conjugation The trt>atment of Visar.!Ja The Third conjugation The Fourth md remaining conjugations Dwandua compounds The du.al number . Bakuvrilt'i and 'l'atpuruslta compounds Euphonic changes of consonants Case-endings of the noun Tense-endings of the verbs Duals of the pronoun!' PAOR l a 3 6 6 G 6 7 9 10 11 13 14 15 15 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 29 30 31 31 32 34 35 35 36 37 39 40
PAGE 8
viii INDEX. The Infinitive The present participle The indefinite past participle active The future participles passive Prepositions . The imperative passive The potential PART II Introduction to the Hitopadesa How to make use of the interspersed Exercises CHAPTER I. PAGE 41 42 42 43 44 45 -i5 47 48 The story of the Crow, the Tortoise, the Deer, and the Mouse 48 The old Tiger and the Traveller . 49 The Huntsman, the Deer, the Boar, and the Jackal 51 The Jackal and the Elephant 53 CHAPTER II. The story of the Bull, the two Jackals; and the Lion 'l'he Thief, the Ass, and the Dog The Lion, the Mouse, and the Cat The Old Woman and the Bell The Crow, the Golden-chain, and the Black Serpent The Lion and the Rabbit CHAPTER III. The Birds and the Monkeys The Blue Jackal The Barber who killed a Beggar CHAPTER IV The Brahman who broke the Pots and Pans The Brahman and his Weasel 58 60 (l:2 63 65 f>7 70 71 73 75 76 Abbreviations used in the Vocabulary 77 Analytical Vocabulary (Sanskrit and English) of the words that occur in the Extracts from the Hitopade.;a 79 Suggestions in regard to an Elementary Course of Sanskrit Reading 105
PAGE 9
INTRODUCTION. THE DEVANAGARf ALPHABET . .il ~ ,,; / ( .. -(ii') VOWELS, &c. .. / / ' J ;x a, ~J d. '{_ i, t_ ,, l! e, it ai, ~T o, u, ii., !.'',[1{ :i, ~ , I,). lrl ,"') ~T mt, • (anusu;cfra) 1i, : (i-isarga) h. I .,.-i:/_ .~ .). ' ' .... \ '-. C01'SONANTS. qi fr,. Tf ga, ll' glw, 11a, Gutturals Palatals Ce re b m Is. Dentals. -:;;f' cl,a , a_ cHa, , ~ ja. '<' jha, '5f ii . a. G t <,. (f tu, Labials. q p a , Semi-vowels. 1f ya, Sibilants and , Aspirate S sa, .,.(,,.. > i {ha, tlia "Cfi pha, ra, 'q' s!ta, ? ~a, ' / da, ! Gf ba, '51' la, sa, ~!ta, 1!]' !!:a. l.f dlra, ;; na. Ma, 1=f ma. qi-a, or 1ea. !ta . The \'Owels in the foregoing : achen~e, as throughout the follow ing pages, must be pronounced ns follows: viz. a as in Roman, 6 as in father,. i as in it; [ as in 11olice , u as in pusli; u as in rude; e as in there; ai as in aisle ; 0 as in so j au as ow in now. The consonants are, in general, pronounced as in English. But tit and pit must be sounded as in the words anthill and uphill, not as in t!tis and philology. The abo\'e forms of the vowels are used only at the beginning of a syllable. The vowel a is inherent in every consonant, and is &oun<;led after every one \''.hich has not the mark of a pause thus-( viz. ,) subscribed, nor another vowel, in a contracted shape, attached to it. These other , owels, when not at the begin ning of a syllable, assume the rollowing cotracted shapes. A
PAGE 10
2 I SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS.,&,.,,., . , ~= Ta, Examples of the Vowels following the letter qi k. ' .qi ka, qiT ka, fc6 l.i", cfiT k{, qi ku, cfi kit, cfi lr;n'., i qi kri, -,., (. : 'C, . 7f kiri, ?{ ldri,: ke, l,ai. cfil ko, cfi1 kau, 'iiCkaii, or kam, qi! kali. The vow e ls u and it are added to the letter '= r thus-~ ru, rit. When two or more consonants meet, without the intervention of a vowel, they co , tlesce and become one conjunct character. These compounds are formerl by writing the subsequent consonant under the first, by blending them in a particular way, or by writing them in their usual order, omitting the perpendicular stroke of each letter except the last. The letter '{ r, when it immediately precedes a consonant, is written abov; it, in the form of"a crescent, thus, Tf rga: when it immediately follows one, it is written as a slanting li11e be neath it thus, sfi km, 1;f gra. The follow1ng are among the most frequently recurring of the CONJUNCT CONSONANTS. kta, 'Ii ku:a, kliya, 'Q gra, ktwa, hlia, l;l':q grya, l{ ghna, kshya, kshwa 'lJ chcha, Si ncha. r=I' tiva, dra, chchhn, 'Ef jja, sJ j~a'. .. Wnga, ha, jm, W: ?J:ta, tta, clda, ':g' dcl!w, (if tna, clhha, tm, tiya, lQ" dbhya, dya, dliirn, ntya, ntra, pta, \:lf b!tya, cha, '9;( sra, stlia, sya, SWl, dltct, 'Ill' shya, ~h(Ut, J Ima, luna, * C o mmonly pronounced gyu. sta. stra, hya, h}<:__, ,,. O,) , l '
PAGE 11
LESSON I. 3 Le.;;;un 1. 1.-A Sanskrit noun, as it stands in the dictionary, is said to be in the crude form. 2.-Nouns. in the crude form, end either in a vowel or in a con sonant. 3.-The vowels with which most nouns end are W a, ,,$if a, ) '{_ i, i: i, u, and ri. < 4. Nouns are Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter. Names of males are masculine, and those of females feminine; but many words are masculine or feminine, which are names neither of' males nor of females. For example, ratha, ' a car,' is masculine ; and A~T chinta, ' reflection,' is feminine. Those tha.!_end in a or i are generally femi11i11~. 5.-By adding to, or otherwise changing, the crude form of the noun, seven different forms, with different senses, are obtained. These altered forms are called cases. 6.-The 1st case is that in which a noun appears when it de notes the subject spoken of in the sentence. This case is called the Subjective, or, more commonly, the Nominative case. 7.Words which, in the crude form, end in the vowels set down in No. 3, commonly make the Nominative by altering the terminations thus:-W a becomes, in the Nominative, ~: ah. " ~T a, remains unaltered. '{_ i becomes,• in the Nominative, '{_: ih,. t i \: iii. ~: uh. ~ri ~a. , N. B.-Neuter nouns ending in a make the Nominative in ~am. Exe1cise 1. 8.-W rite down the Nomiuative case of each of the following words both in Devan{igari and English characters.
PAGE 12
4 SANSKRIT FIRST LESS0~8. VOCABULARY J. aswa, a horse. ~T i'chclilui, wish. ~m.; c'tsana (n.*), a seat. cfT~T vi'!!:h, a lute. ~lr buddM, understanding. guru, a preceptor. ~.:, -~fr.; agni, fire. cfilqi kaka. a crow. i:JniJT mc'tlci, a garland. '9jl' sri, prosperity. 1JlU gu'T_!:n, a quality. -.!) ftrq_ pit7~er. q":q.; vachana (n.), speech. ":q~ chandr-a, the moon. ~q deva, a god. ~T pujci, worship. c--. g?'ilw ( n.), a house. l.ll~ dlwrmrna, merit. q.; vana (n.), a wood. 'qWrf pct1'V'1Jflta, a moumtain l=l'UI rnadhya, the midst. ____ ijID Mnsa, injury. tf';f patm ( n.), a leaf. trf'ff pati, a master. mn dhatri, a creator. J'Qp~ pantlw, a traveller. jala (n.), water. --------phala (n.). fruit. U~ 1ava?3:a, Rava!:'a. q~ vriksha, a tree. & ---qcfi baka, a crane. ~:l du'kha (n ), paiu. '9:J':=I' satru, an enemy. /-!) ( / sabltd, an assembly. . cfij(' kmttri, a doer. \ ______ ..--t, f'9J'CIJ sishya, a disciple. ~-----------;,.igcila, a jackali. . kula (n.), a family. '~ duhit_ri, a daughter. samudra, the ocean. -.!) ~cff pustalca (11 ), a book. cfii=ll'T kan!}(t. a girl. ~-vyaglwa, a tigP.r . .._,_--~n ddtti, a giver. I!hasta, the hand. Ul=I rama. Rama. scistra ln,), a SC'ripture. +: The.Jett-er• n' indicates that the word is Neutt'r.
PAGE 13
LESSON II. 5 'iil'l~ lmihma!!:.a, a Brahma~. RT~ tira ( 11. ), a shore, or bank. rll'.: nara, a man, or male l=f'llll' manushya, a man. t(~ putra, a son. blwkta, a devotee, ~fl=f bhi1rni, the ground. c-. ' cfiftr kapi, a monkey. ~--~. ~?I' huta (n.), a sacrifice. ,, trUf pushpa (n. ), a flower. _ . .a_.,. __ \.frl' clh,ina (ll. ), wealth. l=l'TT 'lll'l'iaa, a deer. t, . i7 ~w;( anna (n.> food. ~ft hari, Vishnu. sfil\.f lcrod!ta, anger. M13:a, an arrow. chakm ( n. ), a wheel l=f~cfi mastaka (n.), the head J:l'..l prabhu, lord. ' . iakti, power. . ~-q smpa, a snake. 'cfifq kavi, a poet. 1;:n~ grama, a village. fsli'll'T kn'.yct, action. ~R 1uchi, relish. "q'T?fcfi pcitaka (n. ), sin. , fq~T vidya, knowledge. l=ff't:tcti mushika, a mnusc. c:--..~ 1 f ':qll. chaura, a t ue . ~'ffl' bala, a boy. l=f~cfi mcilika, a gardener. ~Tl=f arcima, a garden. ffil.T tara, a star. Lesson~. 9.-Some final consonants, in the formation of the Nominative case, are changed thus:' ' ':i;f' eh or "J:J' s beeom'es cfi k. A final .; n is dropped, and ' ' ' ' the precedi11g rnwel (if the word is not ne.tt.t.e.q is lengthened. l 1 is changed to v-isa1ga, and the vowel is lengthened. ' 10.-An aspirated letter (e. g. kha) is changed to the corresponding unaspiratecl letter (e.g. cfi ka ). 11.-Some final consonants undergo no change.
PAGE 14
6 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. Exercise Z. 12.-Write down the Nominative case of each of the following words in Devanagari and English characters. VocABULARY 2. ql":q vach, a word. ' '-n:r.; r(,jan, a king. ' {fta'~ hastin, an elephant. fiir gfr, a word. "-7il'7lo jagat, the world. ' f~"lJ di/,, a side, direction. " ~T~r:{ atman, soul. fq~o vidyut, lightning. ,., ' .;TJ:f;:J narnon ( n. ), a name. -'J ' fq~f~~ chilr~lilch, a 'pamter. Lesson 3. 13.-A Sanskrit verb, as it stands in the dictionary, appears in the form called the root. 14.-To make the 3d person singular of the present teuse, the syllable fo ti is subjoined to the root. Thus, for example, from the root ~"ff as, to be,' is formed .... , r~ asti, • he is.' ' 15.-When such a termination as ti (No. 14.) is subjoined, the root generally requires to undergo some change. According to the nature of this change, roots are divided into classes or conju gations, of which th~re are reckoned ten. I 16.-Roots of the 1st conjugation ii:!_!erpose the short vowel 2J' a between the final and such a termination as ti (No. 14.), and they change a final simple vowel in the rQQt, ( or a short vowel when a single consonant follows,) into its corresponding improper diphthong. 17.-The improper diplitliongs, or gu'!!:a substitutes for the vowels, are the following: -Of?_ i or i the gu13:.a substitute is 1! e, -~ u or it o. ti or ~ri ~{ ar. ' / ]8.-The improper diphthong~ e is changed to ~1( ay, and ?]I) o to ~q av, when a vowel follows. ' " -------
PAGE 15
LESSON IV. 7 Exercise 3. 19.-Write down the 3d person singular present tense of each of the following verbs of the 1st conjugation, both in Devanagari and En~lish l.etters, with the meaning in English. VocAnULAR Y 3. bhu, to become. ~G at, to rove. arh, to be fit. f-ey kshi, to decay. ~1:: char, to go, or get "along. f".5f Ji, to conquer. \ '<, tri, to cross over. tyaj, to abandon. ' dah, to burn. ' dru, to ooze. -,!) "'q'"':q' pach, to cook. "" ( ~ vad. to speak. q~ vas, to d w~ll. \ q~ vah, to carry: W,:f' such, to sorrow for. '-""'--..!) " .........._____. f'P.il' .vri, to serve. B' sri, to go. l, '---------------B'"'q' S?'ip, to creep. .... ~"R smri, to remember. l, . has, to laugh. ' I liri, to take. fi.'')-. ~;:r khan, to dig. ' -"'q'(f pat, to fall. ' tfi~ phal, to bear fruit. ' budh, to know. -.!) ' , l;f".5f vmj, to go. ' Jalp, to prate . .... ,:f'~ chal, to move. ' ~t=I b!tmm, to wander. ' _JJ_ Example. The root of bhii, by ~'16._ becomes ~bho; and the vowel W a is to be interposed between this and the ter-mination fo ti (No. 14)-so that w.ehave bl.o + a + t1'. ;-and then, the o being changed to av by No. 18-we have .:fefo bhavati, ' he becomes.' Lesson 4. 20.-When one Sanskrit word 11nrnediately follows another,
PAGE 16
cp.r{o-J.l.i {f I'/;) f. 31 8 SANSKRIT FIHST LESSONS. some eliange often takes place in the two letters thus brought together. 21.-lf the former of two words placed next to each other ends in ~: aft, and the otlier begins with a, soft* consonant, the ~: ._ ..--. --. ah is changed to ~T o. For example, when 'c!_q: devalt, the . nominative singular ,No. 8.) of c!_q deva, 'a god,' is placed be-for<~ qc!_fo rnclati, the 3d person singular present tense (No. 19: of q~ vctcl, 'to spe,lk '-the two are written thus-~cr) q~@ dw1:o vaclat1', ' the god speaks.' See further under Nos. 94 and 95. Exercise 4. 22.-W rite the following phrases in Sanskrit, both in Devana gari and English letters, taking the words from Vocabularies 1 and 3, and paying attention to the rule-No. 21. The crane wanders. The Brahma~ eooks. The god laughs. The jackal dwells. The quality becomes. The horse carries. The traveller knows. The tree falls. T~1e man prates. The leaf decays. The daughter abandons. The father crosses over. Th.e mouse digs. The water oozes. .The mother speaks. The girl serves. The boy is fit. 23.-W rite down the meaning, m English, ~f the following phrases:1::11=11 7if~fo 1 ~T~T ~-i::fu .1 ~1q1gr ?J:st'fo 1 ,t. 13,';f: ~-i::fi, 1 1 crefo 1 ;;.~ ~t-~fo 1 -q-:si' 1 iITTR~T ~fo I t=1iit q~fo 1 -t. 111~) :st"~n , 1=1101 ~~f?T 1 Lesson 5. 24.-lf the former of two words placed next to each other ends " The s(!/~ consonants arc [flt, .rJlta; ja,jlw; ,?a, ([1,a; da, dl,a; bn, bha; the uasals, the semi-Yo,vels, and /1a.
PAGE 17
LESSON VI. 9 in vjaLJLa:!..\ui
PAGE 18
SANSKlUT FIHST LESSONS. / wander. The tree will bear fruit. The man will remembel". The jackal will tak<~. The Brahman will know. Rama will -------,.-;---------~ laugh. The horse will go. conquer. Rava!!a will cross over, Rama will 30.-When the future is formed by ~fff syati (No. 28) some change often takes place in the final of the verb. The fol lowing list may be committed to memory:~r~fo tyakshyati, ' he will abandon.' ....__ __ t.r~rfo cl!takshyati, 'he will burn.' ~,qf(f d1oshyati, ' it will ooze.' tnefo pakshyati, ' he will cook.' ~,qfo jeshyali, ' he will conquer.' ~'ff 'catsyati, ' he will dwell.' 'T"~l, kl.' tv7;J,~, ,r / , ' Exercise 1 31.-Write down, in English, the meaning of the following phrases:,m ~Tlffo 1 .=r1::: -q~fo I aqr~) 'iiefa , .,if ~fo 1 1 'EIT~1!JT ~firlllfo 1 ~cJ: ~1=1f'{.1ZJfo qiTcfT ~ft.,zrfrr I f-q-01 ~ft.l'llrf o 1 VV"'---' ,.. ~rr~zm-1 Lesson 1. 32.-The 2d case is that in which a noun appears when it is the object of a transitive verb. This case is called the Objective, or, more commonly, the Accusative, Gase. 33.-A transitive verb is one which gives no complete meaning, till some person or thing is mentioned, as the object to whoin or to 1JJliioh the action was done. Rama killed-(killed whom?) Rava~a.
PAGE 19
I.ESSON VII. 11 34.-The following are the ~~c~~s~~ingular endings of nouns that, in the crude form, end in a vowel :-. a becomes am . . ~Ta ~Tam. i im. t i t im. '3' u '3' um. ri-(in some words) ~"{ aram, (in others) dram. 35.-The anuswara,. when followed by a vowel, takes the form of 1=f m. When followed by a eonsonant of the five classes, the ' guttural, &c., it ~tiona_!!y takes the form as well as the sound of the nasal belonging to the same class. Otherwise it remains unchanged. Thus ~';;{ qefo annam vahati, ' he carries the food '-~i:q~f 'ff annain pachati, ' he cooks the food '~i;(~'ff annan tyajati. ' he abandons the food.' Observe that the accusative is generally placed before the verb, as in the examples just given. Exercise 8, v:' 36.-Write down, in .English, the meaning of the following phrases:-~'iw;fltt~o ;;~: 1 ~~'f ~: 1 ~i:ruo ilT"iRl!J: I 'Q"::ft qNfo flfo1::ll I ~~l~efo 1::lq~! I ' :Sf'llfo 1::11=1: I l=fT
PAGE 20
u SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. scripture. Rama wi-Jl abandon the house. The car carries the mau. The son will cook the food. The devotee will know the god. The crane will cross the water. The mouse will dig the ground. The son will serve the father. Lesson 8. 38.-Some useful verbs of the lst conjugation form the present and some of the other tenses irregularly. The following roots, with their 3d person singular pre5ent, may be committed to memory:-slil=f kram makes 'sliT'~fn kramati, • he walks.' ' TJ~ yam ' J'lQ gup -.!) ' \.\"' '!:JT r;hr,i ~T dci dl'is tfT pci I 8/"U TJ~fn gachchhati . • hr. goes.' TJTlITllfn 9 opciyati. • 1ie preJtects: ffflo jighrati, • he smells.' ~T~fi:; ji-vati, • he lives.' yachch!iati, 'he gives.' pasyati, 'he sees.' pibati, ' he drinks.' tish{hati, ' he stands.' srinoti, • he hears.' 39.-When the 3d person singular ends in ,Ji fo ati, the 3d person plural ends in anfi. Thus ~'cffiff bhavanti, ' they become.' 40.-The negative is .=:t' na, 'not;' as ;:; ~efo na bhavati, 'he does not become;' .=:t' ~q'Fq na bhavanti, 'they do not become.' 4I.-1nterrogatives are fcfil=I hm, 'what?' -qi~ kutra, ---' 'where t -cfii!T !.:adri, ' when ?' eiio: kutali, ' whence ?' ' !>
PAGE 21
LESSON IX. 13 fcfi~1J kim-artlwm, 'whv ?'-qi'lf1J katlwm, 'how?' &e. '. 'Examples : fcfi ~efn kim :adati, ' what does 1-ie say?' qj-:f cf~ln kutra vasati. 'where does he dwell?' fcli1J~ltf<=r-;;r ~ll~fo kimartham pitaram. putJ'O na smarati, ; why . does the son not remember the father?' 42.-Verbs signifying 'to go to' require the accusative of the ~ fi / 1.,,/~ place gone to. Ex. cfiT~I 71::a. (1 kcisiii gachchhati, ' he goes ;Ji:! 5 to Kasi (Benares).' Exercise 10. 43.-The son srnells the flower. They go to Kasi. The crow does not see the jackal. Rama walks to the mountain. Why does not the father protect the son? The Brahma!! drinks water. He gives the food. The Brahma!! remembers the scripture. Lesson 9. 44.-The ,Nominative plural is frequently formed by changing the termination as follows:a (masculine) or ~let (mas. or fem) becomes ~T: ah. a (neuter) '{_ i (rnas. or fem.) ayak ~c{: avah. arnh or ~H.: arali. 45.-When a soft comonant, or a vowel, comes after ~SI I (ih, the visarga. is dropped. Ex. ;:ru: narcili, ' men ':-ii~T q~f~ nara vasanti, 'men dwell :'-;:J~T ~tf~ nani arlwnti, 'the men are fit.' Exercise 11. 46. -The mice creep. The thieves take the food. The meu laugh. The Brahma!!S will prate. The jackals drink water.
PAGE 22
14 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. When will the sons cook the food ? The fathers do not see the flower. The men go to the shore. The Brahma12s will not cross the sea. The flowers fall. What do the men say ? _,___ fcfilffi ;:JU r1' "q~f~ I c{~T: ~Rf I ~w;f ~T: " ,, ?if-1: ~Rt I cfilcfiT: 11zj'~ 1 rr1"i: ~fo 1 '{. .Ji"<{4/' .!) ~' . . ~cf
PAGE 23
LESSON Xl. Brahma!]_s remember the scriptures. The boy smells the flowers. When do the men go to the villages? "TfT: cfi~ ~T~Tf~ ~~fr:fllf~ I ftJ~rf_ cfiG_T TJT'Cffn:{~~ tf'::11: I Tf~~~';Jq: I ' cfiV.i ;; tf'f:llf~ cfilqiT: I ~fh,-,-e:JT'\ tr~fo I, 7!~ "TT~r: , ef{oT tro:rfo ftro'{l! 1 cfifcJJ . ~-------------Q~T Tf~fi=r , cfi~ ~;:r1::f~ ft10'{: , mt 11f;:rizrf~ ..!) ~cfil: I ~m ~'::I ~fo ~n:r: I if~fo ~cr: cliffi l.Trf tef~ ~n:T: I ..!) Lesson 11. 50.-The singular of the 3d, or !jstrumental, case, is frequently formed by changing the termination as follows :-W a becomes '(!;; ena. t_ i becomes t_.:JT ind. '3' u '3'.=rT unci. ri -1:T rd. -, A,v,,z,t< -. ;, Ex. {~'1 I~fo hastena ltarita, • he takes with the hand':-~fi";;;;i G.~fo agnina dalwti, • he bu~ns with fire.' Exercise 13. 51.-The men cook the food with fire. The Brahman burns the sacrifiee with fire. The son, with his hand, carries the flower . . Ravana, with. anger, sees the enemies. When does Rava!!a see the enemies with anger? Whe11 will the man take the flower with his hand ? How will the dt'er cross over the water? The .1 _ s 1.,1•-'son, by wealth, protects (h1s) father. Men live by food. /./ Lesson 12. 52.-The in4efi,nite past participle p1tssive g.enerally ends rn 0 ta, and, like an adjective in a, takes the three genders, thus:_'/11 ascu line. Sing. nom. n: tah. Feminine. oT ta. Neuter. 'ff1:l ta m. '
PAGE 24
16 SANSKRIT I<'IHST LESSONS. 53.-The following list of past participles may be committed to memory:l~o smrita, ,t.. ukta, tyakta, fff li:rita, filo jita, / c/ 1'f'R gata, v~ datta, n drisltta, .,,,. "Qfoo patita. -'Q'to pita, ., 'n2 t "'I\I ya a, /7illo jata, ~i:J bln1ta, Cs.' '9.:fo s1uta, " ' remembered.' 'said, or spoken.' 'abandoned.' 'taken.' ' conquered.' gone.' given.' seen.' 'fallen.' 'drunk.' ' restrained.' 'born, produced.' ' been.' 'heard.' Exercise It!. M.Translate the following phrases :-"aJ~ ~~.; I ~: f~ ~'ffi: I ~i;i (. '/ in1=r 1 1::lq'l!JT ~ri:r~ f~ffr: 1 ml=i 11o: 1 ' '-. -cfi~T f-q-:sr1 I l.ft=i ~~l!r I ill iji (Q;:J 'Q'Tol=f I jt,qt ~;; f~: 1 ' The son, abandoned by his father, goes to the village. Rava!!_a, conquered by Rama, will fall. The jackal, seen by the man, will abandon the village. The sons, abandoned by the father, will wander. The crow, seen by the jackal, drinks water.
PAGE 25
LESSON XIII. 17 Lesson 13. 5a.-Th~ is distinguished by the reduplication of t/ the root. The termination of the 3d person singular is a; but if the root ends -in ~T ci, the termination is ~T au. 56.-ln the reduplication of the root, a guttural is changed to a palatal-e. g. cfi k or kh is changed to ':q' eh; and T(' ga to ja. ' ' ' 57.-0ther changes-many of them relating to single verbs-occur in the formation of this tense. _ At present the following examples may be committed to memory:~ vhu makes c{.:fcf babliievq, he became. c:,.. ~----J"f;J ' garn ~J'JTlf jagama, he went. char ":q":q"R chaclicira, he went. f~ ji f:if11111 j?'g(iya, _he conquered. -----~ --------~ -0 tri "c, ooT~ tatara, he crossed over. tyaj ~T:if tatyaja, he abandoned. .. sJ dci dadau, he gave. --. dah cladalw, he burned. '<: ~w ' cl;ri.f c:_ clct_c]ad_g_,_he saw. clru ~Tcf dudJ"Civa, it oozed. ........ . , r 'q1 pet 'q'tfl papau, he clrank. 'tl~ pach 'tltfl':q papacha, he cooked: tr
PAGE 26
18 _!L ~t( t, ' l1i .JL_ [ SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. 1:ah makes . (uc/i I ' sri I sru srip sru ~cfT~ " f~~'ll' ~~T7.f ~HH1::. ~'q ~~T'{ ~TGJ ucaha, he carried. su.~ocha, he 'sorrowed for . I ,I ' h d risraya, e serve . .~u.4ru:i:a, he heard. sasara, he went. ---sasarpa, he crept. sasmcira, he remembered. .susrciva, it dropped. jahtisa, he laughed. jahara, he took. has 7if~TB' . Exercise 15 . . r 58.--Translate the following phrases:-'Ucf~ f~TJT'll' 1::.11=1! I 'ffffil: cfiftJ: I 13;'~f tJo1:1=1 I ~ii f cfill~ ';:J -q-q1-:q ;:fl::: I 'Qll'{ ' " cl@! "Q'Qlo I m~: 9~ I ,=n::: 9~1={ I " ftJoT ~1=17.fl~ I ~l=I~ I cfio: ~~17.f I -.!)-.!> " "" ;;~y t{q-T I lj,111' qi=[ ':q':ql1::_ I The horse fell. The man did not cross the ocean. The Brahma!! remembered the scripture. The father, abandoned by the son, wandered. • The jackal went to the shore. "When did the boy laugh? He gave the food. The Brahman heard the scrip ture. The girl served (her) mother. The fruit, taken by the hand, foll. The thief, seen by the man, cr.ossed over the water. With anger, the enemy burnt the house. l,esson 14. / 59.-When an action succeeus another-as ,,.hen "Rama con-
PAGE 27
LESSOX XIV. 19 quered Rava!:!a, and we11t to his home "-the former action is commonly expressed by a participle called the coujunctive, which implies the having done so and so. 60.-The conjunctive participle (-in uncompoundcd verbs-) ends in r:fT twa. Ex ~Tl=IT nJr:fl 7N :s{TJT;:J ramo, . rciva'!!:aii jitwa. gri"fwn jagcimia. ' Rama, having conquered Ravana went to his house ( or home).' 61.-The .following list of eonj unctive participles may Le com mitted to memory : ~r:fT bhMwd having become. c... tyakwci having abandoned. G_~T clattwci having given. hritwci having taken "qJffl pilwa having drunk. ;1!r:fl smri"twa having remembered. 7'frfT gatica having gone. l1.P drishtwu having seen. ~T lrutwa having heard. f~ sthitwa having stood. ExerciJe 16. 62.-Translate the following phrases :-The Brahnm!], having gone to the shore, drinks water. The son, having abandoned the father, will wander. The men, having seen the tree, will go to the village. The jackal, having drunk water, went to the shore. The son, having remembered the father, spoke. '9;(! f-q'i('f 2!{ ~T ~fo I 61 hR ~: 1J~ ~T o1i: 7Tr:IT 'q~T I ;pit ;:Ji: ~':q'T~ I
PAGE 28
20 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. ;:r~: 1 iff~T tftr:11 Tl rrf~wfo I Lesson 15. 63.-The following indeclinable words, including those given in Nos, 40 and 41, may be committed to memory. YocABULARY 4. ::tr'=~l=ITo _ alcasmut, unex...... , "'11"' , peetedly. atra, here. adya, to-day. -anyatm, elsewhere. >, ~fu 1'ti, so, thus. iva, lik~, as, so. l!'cli'=f ekatro, in oue plaee:1 ' ---.. C. _Q,~! __ eka_q~~i,_~?_one wa. y .. ----'.: l7cf~ evarn, tlrns, in this ,' , manner, , , I"" ): ~ll'tf-T clwidlta, in two wa,.ys.f anyeltha, otherwise . l!cfi~T elcada, at on_e time, 011 F----__ 0_11e_~e~~s10~---l!cf ei:a, also, only. qi~ katharn, 110.w? in what , manner? cfi~Tf,=n, !ca~ac!tit, , times. somefcfi~ kintu, but. s,!) cfio! !cutalt, whence? -!) ' qj~f":qo kutracltif,anywhere. -!) ' • -----------------------cfi~T kadd, ? -0~. tatra, there~ fcfi5i kiiiclw, moreover.\. o~T tadci, then. fcfil=I kim, what? \~1'Tf{ tatluiJti, for thus, for , , example. cfi';f .kutra, where? ;; na, not. ,!) \ oo! tatah, thence, after that; JiT'lf ! pTliyah, mostly. \ I \ W({! atah, hence. l_ '"liG,T yaclci, w?er1. \ ~w at/ta, so, thus, well then. -~-al'if .sarvatra, everywl1ere. adl,un,i. now. oWT tatlu,, thus, ~o.
PAGE 29
LESSON XVI. oT~lo tuvat, so far, so much. 'lf'ql yathci, as. "q'1Ql'ff. pa~chut, afterwards . . , 1=ll.l( rnodhye, in the midst of .. Ui=f~ punar, again. -~ \ ~ift-q samfpe, near to. sarvacla, always. f~ lti, verily, because. 21 64.-lt may be observed, from the foregoing list, that the inter rngotives begin with k, and the relatives with y. The termina-tion _~1:_!ime is~ -as in FfG.T tada, 'then;' thc1.t of_piace is t~as in o':5(' tat1'Cl, ' there.' Lesson 16. 65.-The 4th, or Dative, eas!:h and the 5th, or Ablativo, ease,_ of many words may be formed by the following substitutions. Sing. Plural. For final J Dat. ~T'll' aya 1!~: ebliyah. Abl. ~rn at l[\:ll: ebliyak ~a "" ' For final l Dat. ~'l[ aye ?~: ibhyali. s i s Abl. l!: eh ?_~: ibhyah Ex. ~T1"11'll' rctnu1ya, to Rama ;' ~T'~1!JTR niva~at, • from 'I ' ' , Rava'!!a; narebhyah, to or from the men ; 'i:[~11 1taraye, ' to Hari ;' qi~: kaveh, 'from the poet;' qif~~: kavibhyah, 'to or from the poets.' Exercise 17. 66.-l'he father gave the book to the son. The girl goes from tl~e house. Unexpectedly a flower fell from the tree. He gave wealth to the BrahmaQs. RavaQa, from anger, will not speak. He took water from the ocean. Then the king gave wealth to the poets. The arrow will fall again.
PAGE 30
22 SANSKRIT FIHST LESSONS. t:r-n"lt ~~T-.: I offi TJ"fcfr ifl~T"lt \1.=i ~'ff I ,., ' ~r!_ 'Cff~ci flffiT ~"lt G.~ I {Un ~~Tq_ 1 ~llT"q f~?=rT ~~rf( ~{n:: 1 Lesson 17. 67.-The 6th, or Genitive, case, __ and the_ 7th, or Locative, case, of many words may be formed by the following substitutions. Singular. Plural. For final 1 Gen. asya ~r;:ri dnd111, ~a ) Loe. l! e eslw. For final } Gen. 1!: dt \;:ii fndm. Loe. si ~r au slf isltu. -!J Ex ui:r~ 1'(/1IW8'!)a, 1 of Rama; ~1=1~ sa111uclre, 'in the n--""' s,!) • oceau ;' 011'.: tire, 'on the shore;' ~'clTifT deranam, 'of the ""' -.. gods ;' ~Tlllf !Jl'fi:meslw, 'in the Yil!ages ;' .:r~: haiel., 'of ,., Hari ;' cfici(Tifi kavinam, 'of the poets;' ~7~T ar;nau, 'in the fire;' -qf(fq pati'sltu, ' among the masters.' s,!) Exercise 18. 68.-Rama dwells in the wood. He saw the house of Ravana.. He sees a garland of flowers in the hand of the Brahma!!. Men dwell in houses. The family of tbe jackal dwells in the woorl. He stands in the midst of the fires. He saw the crow on the shore of the sea. He sees the flower fallen into the fire. ;_ ei clHcfiT cfflfo , ~T ~11~ oT~ f~ trJ:lffo I ~T{l1=f "l'(r;fl ~Tq -qfo?f "'liq~ llT.:. f~cfi: I GfT~: cfi~ifi f~T q~'@' I '.!:) cfiTcfiJ;:ri llv.J ~cfil' ;:r cmfo , cfi~~ u~ ----'--' . .....__., .. ---~fo1 I
PAGE 31
LESSON XVIII. 23 /j Lesson 18. 69.-Adjectives, when declined, are declined like nouns. They are very commonly, however, prefixed, in their crude form, to the noun-and then they remain unaltered throughout the declen sion, forming a class of compounds term~d __ Karmi/iaJ,haraJJJJ:., ::..=-. . ' Thus the adjective cfil(!f k7"ish'!!a, 'black,' with the noun " sarpa, 'a snake,' may be written qi~: ~-q: krish'!!ah sarpah, ..s. ,t, -.. or cfil(!f~y: krish'!!asarpal,.1 ' a black snake;' and again cfi'tilJJ;; J -<. krish'!}:enn sarpe1_!CI, Ot'
PAGE 32
24 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. ~,, t "1 t>unya, emp y. I:'-. sunclara, beautiful. -..!) 'lfl'l'~ yogya, suitable. vridcl!ia, aged. (. ef~ dakshina, southern. sthula, bulky. I:'-. clicra, distant. ro~o vismita. astonished. f~ sthira, firm. '"9,"{.1~ pura7.!:a, old ~':q(i ucldta, proper. Like the participles mentioned at No. 52, the adjectives that end in a _genera11Y._!11ak,e the f~ii1inine in a and the neuter in am • . Tht~;-ftl~T ~T priya kanya, ' a b~l~~-d girl ;' GJ~-qJ;:J~ \R~~ (~) clakshi'!!:am ara'!!:yam, 'the southern forest.' Lesson 19. Jti) 71.-ln the formation of KarrnmadharOJ1_a (No. 69) and other compounds (as well as in cases where one word in a sentence immediately follows another-see No. 20-) some chang~_often takes plac:e in the two letters thus brought together. Some rules and remarks in regard to these changes here follo,v. 72.-Similar vowels are those that diff'<:!r only in length. Thus a and a are similar; i and i; u and u, &c. Others-as i and u -are dissimilar. 73.-Two sirnilar~o_wels, meeting,__coale..~~ an!~!:_lll one long ~I. Ex. a + a = a; a + a = a ; a + a = a; a + a = a ; i + i = , &c:. 74.-lf a word end with a or a when the next begins with a dis.~iinilar simple vowel, then a gu'!!_a substitute (see No. ] 7) takes the place of the two c:oncurring vowels. Thu3 a + i = e; ll + U = 0 i a + 7:i = ar. 75.-If a word end with a or a when the next beo-ins with a b diphthong, then a substitute called v.ii
PAGE 33
LESSON XX. Exercise I 9. n.-Turn the following pairs of words into Karmmadharaya compounds-paying attention to the rules indicated as applicable to each-and putting each compound in the nominative singular. ~O sanskrta + ukti (No. 74), 'polished speech.' ,..q~ cinania + ~T~n citman (Nos. 73 and 74), 'the infi, . nite soul.' .=t'~ nfla + ~~ffl' utpala, 'a bin~ lotu~.' i:f~T maha + ~f-q rishi (Nos. 74 and 17), 'a great sage.' Lesson 20. 78.-When the case of a noun depends upon anothe'r noun or participle, the dependent 11oun may be prefixed in its crude form to the other, making the compound called Tutpurus/1a. For ex-ample 'the shore of the sea,' mt samudrasya tiram, . s!) may be expressed thus, ~~(fTi: samud1a-ti1am, 'the sea. -.!) shore.' 79.-ln a T!!:tpurus!ta compound the first term, in the crude form, has sometimes the force of a Genitive,'sometimes of a Lo-cative, &c. For example-in the compound ~~.; panka~1i_a __ '_I!l_l1_d_-su11_k~ the word 'mud' has evidently the for~~ the Locati\e-the meaning being 'sunk~ the mud.' Again-'ffl'T~T'
PAGE 34
26 SANSKilIT FIRST LESSONS. sara!}:a).' 'Deserted (~n=f hina) by leaming Cfctm vidyci).' 'Covered (~f'!o veshtita) with clothes (~ vastta).' 'A couple (~'lf dir:aya [ n.]) of Vf'rses (fflcfi Uoka).' ' Lord ('qfi=J pati) of the earth (~ql ~i).' ' The bank of a pond (m~ saras): ' E.rercise 21 'fto! m:~i: 1'1~ .fl@~~ I ~-==i' f~T~T.:f ifl~T ~:~;; ~ftr-'Qt'@ I ~T.rf~'e" tfl..'lj q~+-1.1;:i ~~fo il'T~~ cf'!q;:f 9;f~ ~.,r fctf%1=fol Gf~q I -.!) Lesson 21. L 81.-The Pronouns are declined in most respects like nouns. The 1st and 2nd personal pronouns are very irregular. The following, being some of the most useful forms in which these present themselves, may be committed to memory. Norn. ~t aham, I. Acc. l=l'T mam, me. Inst. 1=f'lfT may&, by me. Gen. i:r1=f mama, my. Nom. r:i' twam, thou. Acc. r:fl twam, thee. Inst. r:f'lfT twayd, by thee. Gen. ocf tava, thy. 'c:f'lf vayam, we; ~l1=flii asman, . us. ' . ~~1=fTI~! asrnubfiilt, by llG, ~~cfi a-smukam. our. 0\) .Jft L( {C\\ ,fi _.:~ cld ,.::, ,,;,.... 6::,.uv 'lf'lf yuyam, you. c;,.._ 'lflR'Tti yusliman, vou. -.!) ' • 'lf1;1lf~ !yits!tmabltih, by you. ..!!) 'lJ,;ncfi yushmcikam, your. "
PAGE 35
v' LESSON XXI. No:n. ~: sah, he (or 'that'). Acc. ff tam, him. --. Inst. oii tena, by him. Dat. ffilf tasmai, to him. Abl. ~lffo tasmat, from him. ' i{ te, they ( or 'those '). ctT'ii tan, them. ' ct: tai/i, by them. tebliyah, to them. tebhyah, from them. 27 Gen. tasya, his. --. cf1:1'f teshcim, of them. rl ~2-1 I: Loe. of~;; tasmin, in him. .... --. o"q teslw, rn them . ..!J ( ,; .s;;;/ J 82. -The feminine of this pronoun is ~T sci, ' she,' or ' that ' In the neuter we have ct~ tad, 'that,' and filfii tr.ini, ' those.' --------------~----.;:-~--~-----~-~83.-A useful demonstrative pronoun is formed by prefixing 1! e to the foregoing. Thus ~: eshah, 'he,' 'this;' l!ct~ " elad, ' this.' The R!onoun l~ 1dam, ' this,' makes in the Nominative singular masculine. L $ 21 l-f .:.,. I\IJ.F ' 84.-As observed at No. 64, the interrogatives begin with le, and the 1elatives with y. Thus cfi: kah, ' who?' ~lHct kasmat, ' 'from whom?' or, 'from what?' 'l(: yalt, 'who,' 'lfll=flq_ yasmcit, 'from whom,' or, 'from which.' 85.-The Norn. sing. neut. of cfi: kah is fcii Mm, 'what?' ••.• 186.-The indeclinable affixes cli.it, api, and chana, added to the several cases of the interrogative pronoun, give them an indefi-nite signification. Thus ciiif~o kaschit, (No. 25) ' somebody,' -. ,---or, • anybody ;'-~.;f-:;;rrr kenachit, • by some one ;'-fcfif'Siq kinchit 'something.' Exercise 22. 87.-Write the following phrases in Sanskrit. Where is my son? Where is thy book ? The jackal, seen by thee, will abandon the forest. The crow, seen by me, abandons t.he tree. When (was) this speech heard by him? B__?~c,_~1
PAGE 36
28 SANS1rn1T FlRST LESSONS. (was) the speech of the Brahman heard? Where does their father dwell? This is om house. ,vhere is your house? Who sees you? Some one sees you. v\-'ho dwell in those houses? This speech (was) heard by a certain Brahma!! The king gave wealth to hillll, Lesson 22. 88.-The mas. nom. sing. ~: sah, 'he,' 'that.' and l!l(: eslialt 'this,' drop the visarga when a consonant follows. Thus J'f'~:fo sa gacltcldtati, . he goes;' " i:t";;''Qf! esha manu -.!) sliyalt • this man.' 80.-The conjunction 'ancl' is expressed by ':q' clta, which is placed after the second word. Thus fqffi q~ pitc, putrn~clw, '1J ,., ' the father and the son.' In the same way the conjunetion cfT 'VU, 'or ':-thus fq0r 4'=fl 6H pita putra 'l:ci, • the father or the son: -.!) -VocAIJULARY 6. fcfi'itf kintie, but. ,,!) 'lJf~ vadi, if. -"Rf~ tarlti, then, in that ease. parantu, but, on the '-!> other hand. ~fq api, also, even. ~o cltet, if. ..... ----'f ;;"l ':q"c, no cliet, 1 not. ' f{ hi, because. 90. -When the subject or object of the verb is a whole clause, the clause is concluded by the conjunction s:f o 1'ti, ' thus.' For example:1Jcl'i!JT 1:ll={l!J f~o ~fi:r l=l'll'T ~'ff ,,!) "'-"''--1civano 1c'tme'f!_a jita, iti maya frutam, ' Rava~a was conquered by Rama-thus (has been) heard by me:-or '{lcfinT ~Tirl!J f~O ?_fo 'cl'~fu cfl~lfcfi: 1'U.'l:ct'l_l0 1'Cl?llC!!Cl jita, iti 'Vadati valinilci!t, • Valmiki says Ravo!2a was conquered by Rama.' Exerci~e 23. A tiger also
PAGE 37
LESSON xxnr. 29 a garden, but now he wanders on the sea-shore. Something fell ngain. In our village is a master ofyoets. When is an empty house beautiful? The girl and her__!lgecl_ f~t~er_anrl mothir are here. The poet says the tiger went to Kasi. Is this man or that boy suitable? • Unrxpecterlly a mouse fell from the seat. Again the Brahma!}s cross over the water. Everywhere he con quered the enemy. Thus the monkey will burn their houses. The horse went, but the jac:kal even now stands. Sometimes the devotee wandered here. The traveller heard the sound of a lute somewhere. That man knew the scriptures. After that he went slowly to the old tree. Thus he took the books and the arrows, with (his) hand, from the thief. Among the Brahma!}s is a good preceptor. He will sometimes cook thefood suitably. The pre c:eptor says, who laughed then? ]Jesson 2~. 91.-In making the passive voice of the present and some of the other tenses, the lette~~ _to_!!1~~and the tt;.rminations called the ldrnane-pada are Thus, the atmane-pada termination of the 3d pers. sing. present being if te, we have G.~ clahyate, ' it is burned,' 't{~'ff pachyate, kd'' '1t 1s coo e , &c. 92.-Some verbs are conjugated in the active voice, with the terminations called the atmaue-pada. For exalll pie: yat, 'to strive' makes 1am, 'to sport' --' ~T-:;;J locli, to see ' l~T~ "{Ylfcf ' ubli, ' to shine ' shah, 'to endure' -ehev, ' to serve ' sk1m, ' ao smile' ....._ ....._ yatate, 'he strives.' nimate, ' he sports.' ~Ro lochate, 'he sees.' iarttate, ' he is.' loo!iate, ' he shines.' salwte, 'he endures.' ----------sevate, 'he serves.' sm'lyate, 'he smiles.'
PAGE 38
ao SANSKRIT FIIlST LESSONS. Exercise 24. Tr:ms!ate the following sentences. The crow is seen by the jackal. The father is abandoncJJ>y the son. The oblation is bu!'ned by th~_!!:_e. The food i:s cooke1J by the man. The deer sports in the forest. The Brahmar:i. endures pain. The girl smiles. He sees crows on the tree. The king shines in the assembly. vVhy is the gardener pe1plexed? fqor tr~~ riT c:1 I 1::T~ cR~-=q';:f ..!) " ;1=1"l!'a I &:c! 1!~cfi cfi"ff I qiw:rf ~1::~fft f~ffl .=ft~T~~ ~T-=q~ I f(Qtffl iil~T~ ~"ff II j ..!) Lesson 24. 93. Verbs of the 2 nd cm~ugation do not insert the ,~el a before the tensP-affixes (No. )7). Thus the verb us, ' to ' be,' makes ~m asti', • he is., Of the verb 'to be' the following portions may be committed to memory. Sin,qular. asti, he is. ~mto asit, he was. ' astu, )pt it be. s!) Present. Plural. santi, they are. Ist Preterite. Potential. dsan, they were. ' santu, let them be. ' ~To sydt, 'he may (or should) be.' ~: syuli, • they may be.' ' ..!) Exerrise 25. There is in that wood a certain tree. Thy father is not in the
PAGE 39
LESSON XXV. 31 house. There was water eYerywhere. Thus let it be, said the Brahma!!. The son should not be perplexed. In the empty village was an aged jackal. Let the horses be beautiful. The garden is distant. The preceptors should be good men. He says it is proper. That man said it was improper. Having seen the deer sunk in the mud, the jackal laughed. 1=1'1=1' ~~f.:r I ef;l=fil cfi~i=f ~Tfr~: I 'll~ 0~ ~Tq_ ofi f-qo1 ~T~T ~l, >!) ~cflll'ffi I o~ ~;f ~r:11 qi,q ~Tcfi~n: ~: I ..!) ' 94.--In addition to the rules for the treatment of visarga given in Nos. 21, 24, and 48, it is to be observed that~: ah, when a11y /o/'-1-g-;:oweLbut~1Clrt -~_a[oil~~~~-drops !h~ visarqa. Thus ,pll~ :i..~H~1n srigcila dsit, 'there was a jackal.' -,p 2 ' 9-5.-The vowel~ a drops when it comes~a word ending . --. T d ' . m ~T o or 1! e. hus .;1:T S naro' :ya, the man to-day;' "ff S '::f .; te' tra na santi 'they are not here.' The character S serves, like an apostrophe, to mark the place of the expunged vowel. Lesson 25. The following are useful verbs of the 2nd conjugation. bru, to speak (or say). --. if brute, he speaks. vacli, to speak. ctf~ valcti, he speaks. 'llT va. to go. 'll'Tfo ydti, he goes. lt!IT sli'!!_cc, to bathe. ~rfo snciti, he bathes. ,~ ltcin, to kill. tf~ lianti, he kills. 96.-The characteristic peculiarity of the 3d conjugation is the 1:eduplication of the radical syllable. For examples :-G,T d
PAGE 40
32 SANSKRIT FIUST LESSONS. 97.-The characteristic of the 4\!,!. conjugation is 'lf ya. am pies:.::.,,(0 r-~~hitJ; to throw. reJllffo ks!tipyati, he throws . ..... ~'9: jan, to be produced. ~T'llo jdyate, it is produced. ~1J nal, to perish. ~o nasyati, he perishes. " ..... pad, to go. ~--------, ~o padyate, he goes. yudh, to fight. ..... yuclhyat_e, he fights. 11uro ..!) f~ vfrl,, to exist ' fqW viclyate, it exists. 98.-The characteristic of the 5th conjugation is the syllable ..... ;:r nu-changeable, under ordinary circumstances, to .::fT no. Ex---l'-amples:~T't{ cip, to obtain. 1Jqj ;ak, to be able. ' ~Tlfr@' apnoti, he obtain,s. 1!'1il@ sakn't!i, he is able. 99.-The 6th conjugati_un, like the 1 st, takes a short a .,;a . but does not, like the 1st, substitute qzma (No. 17 ;. Ex-. f) am pies:,# 11-:: 'ff'Q tl'ip, to satisfy. l.,' . slf ish, to wish --"-~-'lf,;i[ praclicltlt, to ask. -q~fo _ ___,._ ______ .---~-(.-mri, to die. fu4a -------~--sprit to touch. ~fo tripati, he satisfies. t'cltchhati, he wishes. pricltchliati, he asks. mn'yate, _lie dies. spri!iati, he touches. 100.-The 7th conjugation. in certain tenses, inserts ;:r na c:p before the final of the c.o.ot... Examples:f~ bhicl, to break. Ms, to injure. ' f~;:rf'ij' bltinatti, he breaks. f~;:rf~ lu'nasti, he injures.
PAGE 41
LESSON XXV. 33 101.-The St:h conjugation adds u (which in certain cases -._ becomes -,51 I o). Examples :----' kri, to do or make. cfi~Tfo !.:aroti, he makes. ) Other parts of this verb are ":q'cfiT( chakara, 'he made ;' cfif"('Qffo kar?'.shyati, • he will make ;' cfirlo kiwyycit, • he ) "' " should make.' 102.-Tbe 9tl1 co12jugation subjoins .=fT na. Examples:grah, to tak~. " 'fyl sJT jnri, to know. 7!~r@' g_rilt!J:ctti, _he takes. ~.;rfu jcinctti, he knows. 103.-The 10th eonjugation_subjoins "; i, which is liable, Q • among other things, to be changed. to its impl'Oper diphthong l! e, and that again, before a vowel, to ~11 ay (by No. 18). Examples:-cifi~ l.:ath, to tell. f-:qo chit, to think. ' lf":Ef mail', to advise. ' cfi~1Jfo katlta!)ctti, he tells. f":q~"lffo cM13:_tayati, he thinks. 1={~1Jfo mantrayati, he advises. .:::;:Exercise 26. Translate the following sentences. The son says. Rama kills Rii.va!!a. The king gives wea.lth to the B!'ahma!!, The girl throws the flowers. How is a blue lotus produced here? Rava!!_a fights, but, conquered by Rama, he perishes. An enemy of that man does uot exist anywhere. He obtains wealth. Not any one is able. He satisfies the sons with food. What does that man wish? why does not any one ask him? The man, having gone to the sea-shore, dies. The girl does not touch the flower. The son breaks the fruit from the tret~. The good man does not injure any one. What is he doing? He takes the book. No one knows. Whv does he not tell? Thus he thinks. He does not thus advise. C
PAGE 42
34 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. Lesson 26. In the following exercise the verbs given in the preceding les mn are exhibited in the various forms treated of in Nos. 28, 30, 39, 52, 55, 57, and 61,-a reference to \vhich rules may enable the learner to translate the phrases. Exercise 27. ~T1'~ ;:r1~~~nf.; 1 tfi~ ~T TT~fo 1 cfi~ ;:r cfi~"lf1llfa I l!GJ f~~ftrnl cr~fa 1 1!~ srrm ~,~ol't ~frr I cfi:ef owr ;; ,~r({ 1 ftfffi lf:r Tffl:rnT 7Tt TT~fi; I ~~T: cfiTcfiT ;:r '~ t:. -.!) . ctF-1f~o 1 s~~ir ;:n:: 1 ~~nfi{ ' ,_ . ..._____ ------~Torf.; ;:ft~rtfii ;:J ~Rf 'CR~ ~f.; I tfi:ii Tf~T --,!) -.!) (. l;fll=J ~fo I cfi~ 1'Tio I cfiG_T I "' .... If the disciple shall ask, tht'n he will obtain; if not, he will not obtain. Having seen the ocean, he goes to the mountai11. The monkey sports in the garden, and in the wood, and on the bank of the pond. They say the tra,eller will die. Why do the boys break the garlands? Sometimes he speaks improperly, The beautiful girl bathes in the ocean. I-laving drunk water he goes to the sacrifice. Thus he wandered and there he dwelt. The father, having seen (his) son, smiles. Everywhere and always disciples thus serve (their) preceptors. They endure great pain. The Brahma!!, deserted by learning, does not shine in the assembly. Siu is produced by anger. Good men quickly obtain great prosperity. Lesson 2i. 104.-Two or more words coupled together by the conjunction ' and' may, with omission of the 'and.' be made into a compouud called a Dwrmd1ca. If there be only two words in it, the compound
PAGE 43
LESSON XXVII. 35 takes the terminations of the Dual number. The norn. dual termination of a 'nonn ending in a is ~T cw. Thus • Rama and Lakshma~a' may be expressed by either l:Tl=l'T ~~~"!;Q' .:::,._ ramo-lcikshma1:ascha, or ~TJI'~~~ f rama-lakshma13:au. 105.-When a Dwandw<:t, compound contains more than two \. terms,. it generally takes the termination of the plural. Exam-ple:il'T~~~fil''lffcf~~T: brcihma13:a-kshatriya-vit-sitclr,:,h, 'the Brahma!!_, and Kshatriya, and Vaisya, and Sudra.' 106.-Verbs, as well as nouns and pronouns, have a dual mimber. The 3d pers. dual of the present tense ends in .:::,._ -._ ff: tah. Thus U~ .... ~-(Q ...... f qv=f c{B'o: rcinia-lakslima-?!_au vane vasatali; 'Rama and Lakshmaria dwell in the forest: cfi,T~ '\ et cfB"fl': kakau vrikshe vasatah, ' two crows dwell in the tree.' 107 .-When two or more words a~ together to form an epithet, the compound is called a 03ahuvriti'i. For example:-._ . ' ... -iiri:f\f'<:I' ncim0_@wya, -m-eaning a ' name,' we may have the epit}1et -qi~fi.ct~rfTl=lin:J pcitaliputra-ncimacllu,ya, 'the name ,_.. ~-of whil'h is Pataliputra.' Such an epithet, like an adjective, . ,. -agrees with its noun. Thus t{W~~iiTl=lih:f iiJTf pci-. .:, taliputra-ncimacllieyan nagaram, 'a city named P[1!aliputfa :'-. -._ . cfiW{ffl .;or: kusaclwsto nara!t, ' a man with kusa-grass in ..!) his hand.' 108.-A word in the genitive case wry commonly dispenses with the case-ending. and forms a atpuru~/~ compound with the governing word. Thus ~cfTiiT 1fn{cfi: devcincim yrijakah, ' a -._ worshipper of the gods,' may be expressed by
PAGE 44
86 SANSKRIT FlflST LESSONS. 109.-The changes (rrferred to in No. 71) when heterogeneous letters come together, in eompouncls or in sentences, are not confined to the vowels. The principal rule in regard to the changes of the consonants is the following. ] 10.-A hard consonant (No. 24) before a soft consonant is changed to the soft of its own class ; and vice versd. Thus l=l~'q_ nw!tat + ~'l( blwva = l=l'~'lf ma!tadbltaya, 'great fear.' 111.-A dental consonant coming before a palatal or a cerebral is changed to a corresponding letter :-for example on ,:(' " tat clw becomes (f~ taclteha, 'and that.' The pronunciation is not so much altered by this, but that one who knows the separate words ean readily recognise them when so combined. The same ,l..tf remark applies to the change of ;:J na to lg' ~a in certain cases -as when preceded by '-a. ' 112.-The letters (f t and meeting become chcltlt. -----' " ' The commonest instance of this occurs in (f(f tat + ' ' srutwa = a ~q~T tachcldwutwci, 'having heard that: " Exercise ~8. 'fhe two sons go to the sea-shore. The crow and the jackal dwell in the forest. Having heard that, the deer abandons the forest. _There is, on the bank of the Ganges, a city named Kasi. Why do the preeeptor and the disciple again go to the garden? vVhen will the snake, the mouse, and the horse dwell in one place? Men of slow understanding are infinite. A man of great wealth wishes thus. A boy and a girl of good family are here. A village of empty houses is not distant. A man of great merit says so. A boy beloved by (his) mother and a girl beloved by (her) father are here. Lesson 28. 113.-In the native Sanskrit grammar, all the varieties of de clension are edueed from a set of technical terminations which
PAGE 45
LESSON XXVIII. 37 the learner will find it well worth his while to commit to memory. They are to be rnad across the page-thus "su, au, )as," &c. Sin,q. Dual. Plur . .. Vo,n. .::::.. B su. ~T au. ~B jas. \!I ' ' .1' ICC, am. ~T? cwt. ~I'~ sas. ' ' Inst: ?T t it. ~t bhyam. f~B '-lhis. "" , ~t Dat. & ne. M,yani. b!iyas , AU ~fB nusi. ~t Miycim. bhya s . Oen. ' ~a wt am. nas. 08-'-' -.. Loe, iii, 08. BQ' sup. -,!) '114.-The vociltivc has no separate termination, it beiug co11sidered as a modification only of the nominative. 115.-Now, of these inflectional terminations it is to be remarked, that some of the letters serve only to form syllables and to facilitate enunciation: they disappear, therefore, when those letters which are essential are applied to the word to be declined. These auxiliary letters are the u of su ; the j of jas ; the s of las ; the t of aut and tci; the 1~ everywhere; the i of !wsi; and the p of sup. It is also to be observed that a final s is c~anged to i:isai'a._'J.'he actual terminations therefore will be:-Sin,q. Dual. Ptur. :::,, Nom. h WT au ~: alt. ::::,. Acc. am. ~T an. ~: alt. Inst. ~T a. ~t ohycim. f~: b!tilt. Dat. l! e. ~f bltycim. ~: bltyalt. .:Jbl. ~: ah. , ~( Utycim ~: hltyah. "' Gen. ~: a/i. w: oh. ~i am. Loe. 'l. ~): o/i. B 8U, ,!) J ' s-vsf 'la.,, ' 'W ' 5.t,,,, z 'a,.;( •fc;.,, ~ , ' rxtu,i 1::f ' 0,,,-f J
PAGE 46
~::.... 38 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. 116.-ln applying these terminations to the final letter of the word to be declined, recollection must be had of the rules for the permutation of vowels and consonants. For example, i11 d 1 . . h d ' 1 . ' . b b d ec mmg t e wor ;:JT nau, a s 11p, 1t must e remem ere that ~T au, followed by a vowel, becomes ~Tcf av; and that " s becomes l:( sh when it follows any other vowel than a or -,-~~-~---. ' a and is not final. Thus :-Sin.g. Dual. Plur. Nom. ;:n: nauli. a ship. 'iiT'ql ncivau, two ships. ;:JT'cf: navali. [ships. Acc. 4r~ navwn, a ship. 'iiT''(fT nct'i'aU, .=r1e:r: nlvah, """ • ~.c: Inst. ;:JlefT navd, by -•=n~T naubhydm, 'iiT1~: naubhilt, "' . Dat. 'iiTcf nci1.:e. to rfT~ naubltycim, ;:rT\i[: naubhyalt, Abl. ;:rJq: ncivah, from . 'iiT~ nauhltyriin, ;:rT\i[: naubltya!t, Gen. 'iiJq: ndvah, of .=rl'c('T: nch:olz, viT'c('T nct'Vum, "Loe. 'iilfq ncivi, in ;:r1cn: ncivoh, 'iiTll' ,.!) nairnhu, Exercise 29. Write down, with the signification, the following cases of the following words, viz.:Inst. sing., inst. plu., and Joe. plu., of ukti, 'speech.' Gen. sing. and inst. sing. of ~nm.=r citman, ' son] I or ' self.' Loe. sing. and gen. plu. of fG_~ dit 'a side ' or 'direction.' " Loe. sing. of l=f~ manas, ' the mind.' Inst. sing. and inst. plu. of ~qfJ,;; agni.'' fire.' Norn. dual and loc. plu. of ;:r~ nadf, 'a river.' Loe. plu. of ~T stri, 'a woman.' Dat. sing., inst. plu., and Joe. l)lu. of f,n-::i-JJft_n, ' a father' Inst si1 . -----------:--.., \ l . . ) g.' dat. sing., abl. sing., inst. plu., and gen. plu. of 'c('T":q vach, J~~..._ '
PAGE 47
LESSON XXIX. 80 speech.' Inst. sing. of l=[~ij marut, ' the wind.' Loe. sing. of Jamd, 'autumn.' Gen. plu. of tfll=f'o. dhimai, 'sensible.' Loe. sing. of ~1:~ sams, ' a pond.' Gen, plu. ' of l=ftrf~~ rnadhu-lili, 'a bee.' " ' Lesson 29. 1 i 7.-As the native Sanskrit grammar presents one scheme of terminations which, by means of the requisite substitutions, may be accommodated to all nouns, so it presents one scheme of terminations which, with the requisite substitutions, becomes appli cable to all the tenses of every verb. These terminations are enunciated in a different order, ~s'"7egarcls person, from that to which the European reader is accustomed,-the personality appli cable to what is spoken of being the first, and that applicable to the speaker being the third. Instead of naming the persons by nu1n bers, therefore, it may be advisable here to give them the epithets appropriated to them in the native grammar,-calling that which ~'-"~ is spoken of the. 'Lowest,' the one .~poken to the 'Middle,' and the , ~;;J> speaker the 'Highest' person. ll i.~~(..> ~-r,1;1W ,r,,.'f"" ~ 118.-The terminations are as follows:''OI"" ttfi,t.l Dual. Ptur. o c. 1.l,.,c, ~~~-Lowest. Sing. frr-q tp. ' f~ jlti. !pe,/.w...-1;; ~,Middle. 'V:fB tlw s. ' tha. S~ .._-, Highest. f1=J1l 1mjJ. 'cfll 'Cai;. 1=Jll mas. 119.-In these, as in the inflectional terminations of nouns, (No. 113), some of the letters serve to indicate certain operations; and these are rejected when the termination is affixed to the verb, After the requisite rejections and substitutions, the terminations apper,r as follows:cl, fo ti. o: tah. ~f.:q anti. -------------jJ,. f~ sz. ~: thah. 'V:f iAa. 14.. fu m. q: vah. l=[: mah. (;td i -I
PAGE 48
cl.. 40 SANSKHI'l' FlltST LESSONS. 120,-Adding these terminations to the root ,._,q ad, 'to eat.,' and changing its final soft consonant to a hard one (No. 110) when the affix begins with a hard consonant, we ha"e atti, he eats. ~r~: attah, they two eat. S!-1 [ adanti, they eat. JJ._' ~,qfm atsi thou eatest. S!i'("ll: atthah, you two eat. S!i'?ZI [ attha, you eat. admi, I eat. S!,t'a: adwah, we two eat. ~: [ admah, we eat. 121.-When the short vowel a prc:,cedes the rn or v of the tense affix, it is lengthened. Thus we have ~::(<:{'Tfl=I Uiavami, 'I become :'-.:JfqlZJTf'Jf Mavishyami, ' I will become.' 122.-ln order that the foregoing set of terminations may serve for other tenses th~ present, they require to be ~i=-. ously modified. For instance, as ma)'. be gathered from No. 28, the syllable sya requires to be interposed when the sense is to be future. Again, to express time past, (that of th~t ~reterite) ~the finr1l i of the si1~l~1i:_k_dropped,~ap_QJlie 'S!,t' a is prefixed to the verb _a!l_ ~!1. a11gl!lent. Th us S!,t'~(f ' avhavat, ' he became.' 123.-Wt 'I,' ii,( 'thou,' and ~: 'he,' are declined m the dual as follows :-Nom . wr~i .Ace Inst. S!i'T~~ Dat. --------Aul. ...._ Gen. ~,qif.1Hn: Loe.
PAGE 49
LESSON XXX. 41 L:xercise 30. Translate the following sentences. Who art thou? I go to the village. They two will go to the village. Do you two go to the wood? Shall we two go to the . . . ~'-----...___. __ sea-shore 1 '1.'hou seest my house. What dost thou? What do';t thou wish? What dost thou say? I do not say anything. Art thou able, or not? I am not able. I see thy son. . . ;,.q~ .Jl' TT~r~: I 'l'll ~11,~ .; ~1,zr I oT cfillfTo 'll~o: 1 ~~.; cfifeJ~ qf 1 ~fll~ f-:q~-' ~' I I ;,.qt J;ffl{ 'tfi=f11[1=flll'Tf1=1 I 'iflfflcfil .._!) ..__._ .:tit 1 ~~f1=1<'f cfifl.lltT1=11frr r=t cfioT .:t -aJef 1 .......----' ~Lesson 30. 124.-The finitire is formed by adding 'ff tum. Ex. 'llfff " " yafurn, • to go.' Many verbs insert '{_ i before 'ff. Ex. ~f q?f b!tadtum, to " ,., oecome.' The following is a list of infinitives. kri makes 111=1 gam ' f~ Ji ~T clct cl:rii TI slitlta •C::. cfi~ karttum, to make. 11~ gantum, to go. " -.. . ~o jetum, to conquer. " ~T'ff du.tmn, to give. " ~"!' draslitum, to S<'P. " . ~T'fi sthcitum, to stay. " q~ 1:aktum, to !3t".!ak. I!-.!) ,;-
PAGE 50
42 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS . Exercise 31. Translate the following sentences. Ra.va!!a is not able to conquer Rama. The father wishes to give the book to the son. The two sons wish to go to the wood. Dost thou wish to go to the sea-shore? I wish to see my father. Do you two wish to stay here? What
PAGE 51
LESSON XXXII. 4.3 127.-A class of ftdure pxrtfrip'.es, r:aost extensively employed, is formed by the affixes n'aij tcwya, ~;:f}l( aniya, and lf ya Examples. ~fcl"rl'olf bliavtavya,' what is to be or ought to be;' ~iiT1' sahaniya, 'what is to be endured;' labliya, 'to be acquired.' The following are further examples:cl ffia:f '1:aktat'!}a, to be spoken. bltajya, to be worshipped . w~ . ;al,ya, possible. sah!)a, endurable. qjl-iij ktiiy!)a, to be made, or
PAGE 52
SANSKRIT FIIlST LESSONS. sense of their component elements; but in many instanct>s they ha,e significations which depart widely from those whieh they might be expeeted, from their composition, to conve~. The explanation of such compounds is the province of the dictionary. 130.-0f the twenty-one prepositions, the most useful here follow, the sense being exemplified in verbs or in derivatives, of frequent occurrence, from verbs compounded with the prepo sitions. ~fo ati, ' beyond.' ~'N adhi, ' over.' ~f oslitl=lfo ali'l.'1'clmCtti .• he goes beyond.' ~N1"Jo acl!tigata, 'go.ne over' (as a book when read through). anu, 'after, like.' ~~1:fo anuc!tarati, 'he goes after ' (as a diseiple goes after and imitates his preceptor). Cl])a, ' off' ~'Q~1:fo apaharati, ' he carries -:>5l ff1 ab/u', • opposite.' ~T d, ' reversing.' ~'Q upa, ' near.' f'1\_ mr, ' without.' -qf~ pal'i, ' nrnund.' fflo pmti, • again, back.' fq i,1, 'apart.' 8am, 'with.' off.' ~ff11'J"~fo abhigacltcltlw11, ' he approaches.' ~TJ'J~@ dgachcltlwti, 'he comes.' ~HG,G,l'fu cidaclati, ' he takes.' ~-qf~ upatislt{lwte, 'he standa near.' f~ijlSJ nirdoslw, ' without fault.' -qf'~ftf parid!ti, ' perimeter.' tfrftcnr{ pratikrira, • retaliation.' MffiG,.=i' praliclinam, ' day by day.' 'rcl'lfFT viyoga, ' disjunction.' fcfcfill: vikdra, ' c:hange of form.' . ~JI r;angama, ' association.'
PAGE 53
LESSON XXXIII. 131.-0f prepositions used separately or without verbs, 'Rfo prati, 'towards,' governs the accusative; salia, ' with,' go verns the instrumental, and fq;;T vinci, ' without, except,' either the accusative or the instrun1ental. Exercise 33. Translate the following sentences. This book is to be gone over by thee. The disciples go after the preceptor. Rava!!a carries off Sita. The traveller approaches the tiger. The traveller does not approach the tiger without fear. The father, with the son, stands near the tree. The crow does not associate with the jackal. Day by day the crow and the jackal assoeiate with the deer. How is their disjunction to be made ? l.l~ l=ITffsfiTm'o llfnfG_;;~ ~J:t:. , ~ToTi:rtJ"if{T'{ lT~: , f~'IQT "' ~ci fq;;T ciZfmT w=r)-lf11~aij: 1 -q~: ftJnll:rtnnirif 1 ~-==r llffiifiTU ;; ' 0:::. -• ~: I '" ~Tfol E-~_TJT~: I {~Tc=f. ftJnT 'Qacfil:JT~G_Tln I ~;;f~TJ?rlJT@T i:ri:r 'Q'=:fT: \ ~ fcii q~ "IJj~Rf I Lesson 33. 13:2.-lt will have been observed, in Lesson 24, that the 3d pers. sing. of the imperative euds in o. ln the passive the termi-.!> nation is of tdm-preceded by the 1J ya of the passive (No. 9I). Thus ~1Jffi sruyata.rn, 'let it be hea1d ;' fslil1ol kriyatam, (;'\ . • Jet it be done;' ~1'nl clri;yatam, • let it be seen;' ~ni uchvatft.111, ' let it be told.' 133.-In Lesson 24, the potential is exhibited ending in 1JTo ' ycit-as cfiil{1({ kuryycit, ' he should make :'-but the form in " '
PAGE 54
46 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. which it is more commonly met with is that of the Jst conjngation, where it ends in l!n et. Thus ~n bl1aret. 'he should ' " be;' .JqcJ: Maveyuh, 'they should be.' ,.!) Exercise 34. Translate the following sentences :The preceptor should be a good man. The horse shou10 oe white. Tht'l disciple should not be perplexed. Let the wish be heard by the father. Let the deer sport in the forest. Let the beautiful girl smile. Let the crow go. Why should it be im proper to do thus? He should obtain_ merit. They should go home. Let not injury be~-~~~;. ~ -------q.=f trr .. ~) .; ;;,jt" 1 i:rtoT R"'T ~'rl'T1'To 1 ' ---I f~~: qi~: ~1f.=r ~1flq_ I 'qcfil ~1'To I q~ ~nt .; ~~To I f-qrflii inrt ' ' ,., (.. c,,. cfi~To I ;x~ f{(fPJ~TTJ: "Q'it(f 'Wif~ ' -.!) ~~--' f~'ffT I . . " /08
PAGE 55
F..XTRACT I. 47 PART II. DEING AN INTRODUCTION TO THE HITOPADESA. PROFESSOR .Jm-INso~. in the rreface to his very useful edition of the Hitopade.sa, "with a grammatical analysis alphabetically arranged," notices, among the other recommendations of that interesting collection of Sanskrit tales, that" In no single work is there to be met with a more comprehensive assemblage of serviceable words and phrases." " The moral verses with which the Hitopade~a abounds are (Mr . .Johnson tells us), in many cases, perhaps in all, quotations from dilferent writers. They consequently form a sort of anthology,-a collection of passages, not only remarkable for striking thoughts, but offering examples of various styles." These verses being considerably more difficult of construction than the stories in which they are inserted, the beginner will run the less risk of being disheartened if he be required to construe the stories only in the first place, -the verses (-except where they may be indispensable to the narra-tive, or otherwise deserving of immediate notice-) being laid ~side for future consideration. After some introductory verses, the compiler of the Hitopadda proceeds as follows -Extract 1. ~fur ~1rr1~,fin1"'i: lfl?f~~-==r;;11=1il"lf ;;rr~ 1 ~~~Wl~tlfn: ~;r'J);;) .=n1=1 ;;~efn1::1B1o 1 " ,!) 'The king here mentioned having a set of idle sons, he secured the services of the learned Vish!iu.(a1man, who undertook to reclaim them by telling them stories calculated to excite in them an interest in political affairs. The narrative proceeds rui follows:-
PAGE 56
SANSKRIT FIHST LESSONS. trr~n~1!i ~ijT'Qf7.f~T.;i '(T~~~i ~1;~T~ 'Alii I cfifiif~ tJf~cft sif~.f1o I ~J'5J'Q"::fl: 'SJ~o I ~-________., ,, L -.!) qjT~~-m1f'cfrr)~:.:r cfiT~T ~fa l.ftllor~,--clf~#'iR rir~i f~T qRil~ii cfT II " fffl'cfot fq;:r)~1" cliTcficfi~T~1'.=rt farrq-:srt cfiWT cliW-"' "Tfi:r I 1 cfi~oTR I f1.1~J~rJ11" ---' " ',!) --... 1.1r,q 1 ~1=9:fo I fi=r~~n~: "A~li~ "~T"l=lm: (." "' fflcfi: ,-------~~Tl.J.:JT f'cf~trrT 'i,firl=Rf: ~~m: 1 ~Ttf"~TW cfiT1,;ijTf1:U cfiTcficfil{l:rTf~qo II __':! ~~---C'\ L '" ' The meanings of the words in these extracts are to be sought in the accompanying analytical vocabulary culled from that of Prnfessor Johnson. The references by numbers are to Part First of these Lessons. Exercise 35. Trmislate iuto Sanskrit the following sentences, which involve words comprised in the foregoing extract, in addition to oth':'r words already met with in Part First ;-and write also, in Sanskrit, answers to the questions.* Where is the city named P{italiputra ? What city is on the bank of the Bhagfrathl ? Who was Sudarsana ? Where were the princes seated ? How_ were they seated? How does the time of the wise pass away ? How does the time of fools pa::8 away? Extract 2. • For examr,Je, in reply to the quedtion, "How does the time of fools pass away ?"-write, in Sanskrit, (as in the text,) "'l'he time of fools passes away in dissipatiun, slumber, or strife."
PAGE 57
EXTHACT III. 49 TJT~JefUoT~ feJ~T~~r~~1~: I 0~ ifTifTf~r~~T~TJ~ -qf~~T f-,q~f~ I cfi~Tf~~ ~t[q(f-" -.!) if cn.;TllJ 'efT"lf fl ~T"ll"T~ "QT~~~ ~Ttfll"Q"'-11({_ I ollc[~T~ o~~~'slilt~ ~Tcfiijr~f~rr: 1 if;:r '-' " • ..,!) .......-,<=r""' ~ill.Iii O~-~clil!fT;J fqqif~ fc[~T~l=f I ' ' 'A~ f~n I C,. Exercise 36. What did the princes say ? Where was the great silk-cotton tree ? What was on the banks of the Godavari ? Who dwell in the silk-cotton tree? Having come from where? What was in the hand of the hunter? Who saw the hunter approaching? Who went after the hunte1:? What was done by the hunter? Who remained, having become concealed i' Extract 3. nr~~c[ cfil~ r~~~TefiflllT cfit1Trr'(r~: ~tlf~c[T u ~~fff fct~~~~cli~Tif ~c(fflcfi1JT1=1T~ I ' The king of the pigeons warns his followers that danger lurks under the grains of rice spread out in this uninhabited quarter, and he tells them the following story, to show them the danger of yielding to the temptation of covetousness. cfitll'ff'(T~: cfi'lfllfo I ~{ircf.~ ~~'(lN ':q'(i;(t(~"lf1=1 1 l!cfi) ~.r~~nr: ~10: cfi~~: ~'('ij:ff~ if"ff ' (. ~) ~: t1T~ s:~ ~ef~cti~ rRnn1=t I offi ~)~T---,!) cfiFr ~.;fqc=r ~'iJ;:rr~tf~o1=1 1 ~1:rii~oa (. \ ' ' 7.Jfo I The traveller, not unnaturally, distrusts the tiger; but the ])
PAGE 58
50 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. tiger (by means of learned poetical quotations) dissipates his distrust; and the traveller, as directed by the tiger, goes into the lake, preparatorily to the receipt of the golden bracelet, to bathe. 'ffffi ~nfq'P;llffl lJlq~m ~'{: ~n1 'RP=r!: ffiq~q -;JtT~ f;;i:{1".;: 'q'ffllflf~Jf~i:J: I 'q'l -qf'ffcl ~T olffflT sq~q_ -;J~T~ 'CITnffi .. f~ I ~n-.&:; -._ -._ ~lil("lfl'q'lJ1 Iii I (~~I ~;:r: ~.=f~'qTJ'Rf O'i -.!) ,,!) vc=r: 'q'l--~) o[fJ-qTf~n: ~Tf~c=r~ 1 (. The warning against covetousness, conveyed m this story, being thrown away upon the pigeons, they pounce down upon the rice, and are ensnared in the net. By the ad vice of their king (-who is too magnanimous to allude to their disregard of his previous advice-) they make a joint effort, and fly off with the net, leadng the hunter dis1.ppointed. They proceed to the abode of Hiranynka, king of the mice, a great friend of tlie king of the pigeons, to whom they tell their tale, begging him to cut their snare " by the force of his teeth". Exercise 3 7. At what time did the kinb of the pigeons behold the grains of rice? How [in respect of his movements or his attendants] was the king of the pigeons, when he beheld the grains of rice? By the old tiger what was said? By the old tiger how circumstanced? By what was the traveller attracted? By whom was the lake entered in order to bathe? Who became immersed in a great quagmire? Having seen the traveIIPr fallen into the quagmire, what did the tiger say? By whom was the traveller seized and devoured? The pigeons having been freed from the net by the teeth of the mouse Hiranyalca, the crow, who had followed as a spectator, seeks the friendship of the mouse. The mouse is exceedingly suspicious and cautious, but the eloquence of the crow finally pre-
PAGE 59
EXTRACT V. 51 vails, and they strike up a friendship. The crow takes the mouse to visit a friend of his, the tortoise Manthara; and, in the course of their conversation, the tortoise tells the following story illustrative of the dangers of too strong a disposition to hoard. Extract 4. ~TB~~) rfll=I ,?
PAGE 60
62 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS . Exercise 39. Who saw the dead deer, hunter, and boar ? Having behtld, what did he think? For whom did great store of food present itself? By the flesh of whom will there be abundant food for three months? In the first desire to eat, what was first eaten by the jnckal .;) The ~inew-string being cut, who went to destruction ? How so? While the three friends dwell happily on the wooded borders of the lake, they are one clay joined by a frightened deer, as the following extract tells us. Extract 6. ,..q~ cfi~:rR:rf~~lW~l{T l{TJ: ~iitftt ~1f~o~ fi:rf~o: I 00: -q,~nG_T~l~ .JlJ~'ff ~~Tolf ,., l{ .. ~) 'Sf~ ttf~re) 1![tp.fi~ feJ~~ TJo ~ft"ll'l:rT.=r: cfilctiT 1~11;1m~: 1 offi ~~ttoii~ii fii~12f .JlJ~~ qif "'llfeJ~Ticfio: I tT~T~TJ'J~ tT;;: Bi ~ fl{f~~fcn!T: I I .J~ llJ'J ' t. ~~lJT ~~cfilm~TU s';=f~lJnlll I ~q~l~ii .0 c:,.. ' q~l{~ B.=tl~TililJo1~ I f-:q~w) 1!ff I ~;ll-fBoT ~t ~t ~"(~i:11rro: 1 Exercise 40. Who, on one occasion, having come there, met them ? Bv whom was the deer alarmed ? Having supposed a cause ~f alarm (to be) toming behind, what did the tortoise enter? What did the crow, flying upwards, mount upon? By the crow, having looked afar, was any cause of alarm obse1ved ? Afterwards what was said by (the tortoise) Manthara? What dor.s (the deer) Dappled-bodied say? Who came for refuge? Frightened by whom-did the deer come for refuge?
PAGE 61
EXTRACT VIII. 53 Extract 7. ~1l( 1=1•-v:JU ~R I B~ ll7T ~.=r ~~ffi .. f~ ~~f~1=1'1_ frf~if 'q~ ctre:rf-:qc=r_ fcfi olfl\if: I 1!Tf~Tili~ I clIT~Wfcfti~ ~Wt iif-;J -.,-qfi=r: , ~-=q fefnr~~:rsiihm11~ -:q~~T7Tl'rf~Tcfft (. ~l{TqlfBocfi?cfiT cri~ I lHnVJ ~rfl~T7T~ cfi'q'~~~: ---~ BllTir .JfcJ0"6lff1=1fc=r "6lf11t.n.:ri lJ,~Tc=r_ fcfil.~~~1 ~it, ' ~~f-q i:rrc=r~cr~1;:f .Jlf~ocfifll~T~~ lf~ cnT~ / c=r~~~ffi~ I 0'4ir--lT B.Jlf;(T~ I fi:I~ ~~T-'-" , ~lfl~t 1T~Tfi:r I cfilcfi1!1Tlqf-q ~cfr#T I f1=1~ l!cfl=lffl II -.!I Exercise 41. What does Manthnra, the tortoise, s,iy? By whom was it s::iid "Frien
PAGE 62
M SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. o~~l=ITcfiiloi~.; l=ITB~~~"ll~ ~T~'ifri I (frfij:f"Pl=IUJT~~i'rf ~1I,TfT~"rf "Rfnsrr ~ffi I 1=1111 ;;flrll~TcfTG,~ 1=1~~ BNflJo"61f~ I Exercise 42 What did Hiranyaka here say ? Having done what-did Hiranyaka say this ? In the forest of Brahma there is an elephant : -what is his name? Having beheld that elephant, what did all the jackals think ? By whom was this thought? Was the elephant, by any contrivance, destroyed? By whose contrivance was the elephant destroyed? Who was destroyed here by the contrivance of the_ jackal? By means of whose body may there be food for four months? Of whom may the elephant's body become the food? By whom was the promise made, viz., "The death of the elephant is to be accomplished by me-" ? What was the promise of the old jackal ? Extract 9. q"5i{qi: cfilRfffiitcfiBl=ITti' 7Tiil'T B~TW-C's 'tff(f ~'Rl'TGfT~ I ef~JmT~ cfi~ I ~ffl ]if~ I -.!) c-.. cfi~ 10: ~l=IT"ll'To: I m' sq~ I ~~cfil .,,~1=( I B~ cr.=;Gf1fm~: ,rJJf~f~f~ ~Gf~cfil~ 1r~nft10: 1 ,0 . 'llfu.=iT 1::T~T ~T"ff .; oG,"ilT?GftU~ sf~~ s!) ,., " ~q:y;; HiBrrfim~titm f.,ef~o: 1 cFil~ ~r.=r-, " ;; ~~fu ~~T7T~t ~~.; (Q ijiT ~(~11 s.!) ~o: II Exercz'se 43. Thereupon, what did that deceiver do ? What was said uy
PAGE 63
EXTRACT XI. 55 the deceitful jackal? "My lord! deign the favour of a look !" -by whon:: was this said ? What does the elephant say ? " Who art thou?" -by whom was this said? "Whence hast thou come ?"-by whom was this said ? Who said '' I am a jackal " ? Is it proper, o.r not1 to remain without a king? How did this jackal go off ? Extract 10. nffi sBT ~l~~T~Tff: cfill~fo~cfi: ~TfT~~fw-t.. (.. oqctf.;r l.flcfti l=f{T~ f.;ww=r: I ef~~l=f I . '-'-fcfil=f,iif fcJif"li l=l~T~ "Qfoffi "'~ll_ I ~TfRili=f f74 '~ I ~q 1=(1=( ~Tl;( {~ ~~Tfff I nffi i:r{Ttfl; f.;1=1Ti{f ~TJT~~f~o: 11 Exercise 43. By what road does the elephant, by name Karpuratilaka, go ? Attracted by what does the elephant go? How does the elephant go ? In what did the elephant become immersed? What was then said by the elephant? By whom was it said, '' Friend jackal! what is now to be done "? By the jackal, having laughed aloud, what was then said ? "Having clapped your trunk to the end of my tail, get up ;"-by whom was this said? Who, and now, was then eaten by the jackals? All the remonstrances of the deer, against the tortoise's venturing across the country to another lake, are thrown away;for we read as follows : -Extract 11. (fo'ffi':q.;l=[~l.fR' l=f~ffi ~.; l=J.'qU ".iRifT9;f~l=f" "A':qf~n: 1 if "f-q f~~~cfiT~!i~i:r'i~l!: 1 a a: ~.=t ~.=nf-q ~1\lw=r ~;:f ~?oT
PAGE 64
66 SANSKIUT FIRST LESSONS. l=f•~: lH1N: I B~ (t' 7J.{1r=.rT ~?l(Tizr l.T~ l.T~T s l1=11~f~l.TT'lf ~.r1T~1f~~ 'tlllTn: 1 if (. -!:I 1iTfeff'll'Bl=fftJq;r: tft fcfttR_~tf7Tnl~~~RI ll=l'I Exercise 44. Having left what-did Manthara, the tortoise, set out? Who set out with great feat? Having disregarded the speech of the mouse, what did the tortoise do? What did Hiranyaka and the others then do? Whom did Hiranyaka aud the others then follow ? Was the tortoise, going along on land, caught. by any one or not? By whom was the tol'toise caught, going along on land ? By a huntel', prowling about the fol'cst. who was caught? Whu then set out towards his home? " Fortunate am I !"-by whom was this said? Who then experienced extl'eme grief? Who followed the hunter? Extract 12. nffi n:r~'lll f{~~cfif-sq-:srrw~l:f'ijo;:JcfiTcJT~ 1 'lllcJ~
PAGE 65
EXTRACT XIII. 57 is to be done ? Having heard this, what did those two say ? Which two say-" Quickly direct how we are to act"? Having gone near the lake, what shall the deer do? Who shows himself motionless, as if dead ? Having stood over whom does the crow mark him somewhat with his beak ? By the hunter, desirous of fl~sh, what must then be clone ? Having quitted the tortoise, who then goes quickly near the deer? Who will cut the bonds of the tortoise ? Who said, " I will cut the bonds of the tortoise "? Extract l3. onf~~TW~~qn.=rcfilaj ~11i TJ~T o~~fi@ ~fn ~Tl.f: -qft~1~: m~'"t'lf "tfTr=.tT nlT~t.Ralfi-qfq~: Q~ 'ff'J:{Tfql.f l=J_TJ;:Jq~~ cfi~tr ~fflQ;:JJ'q f-;,lfflf q;jfi:cfiTl=llG_TlJ tl~i:f.;T l=ITJTf~ci; ":qf~n=r: I . f~~'{ttf~tiTTJ~ f~w;J~it.J.;: Q ~l-'H: ~fflT~'lf 'R'fcr~: Q':q l{TJ ~T~ii "R ~Tl.i f7.ftiiT~ ~?~Tlf "QfflTf110: v t1~PI~ ~cnT 1117.f({ n~rr-ffll=IT11Tf o oT~o cfii.~1=1t1~~;;Jf~~1n; , ~f~oii' ' =Jtffn l=l'l=l'TBl=IT~qffil::~: I 'ff{fl' sm f.;~1~: cfi?cfi ' . 'R'f~: I l=fi~l'{TG_'ll'~ ~W ~T"tf~: ~T'if 7'frirT 1J~T~l=ITf~oT: II Exercise 46. It having been thus done by the deer and the crow, by whom ,ve1e they seen? The hunter, wearied, having dl'Uuk what, sat down undet a tree ? VVho went neat the deer, having seen the deer in that condition? Having taken what-did the hunter go near the deer? Having placed the tortoise where-did the hunter go near the deer? By whom were the bollcls of the tor-
PAGE 66
58 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. toise cut ? Having his bonds cut, what did the tortoise
PAGE 67
EXTRACT XVI. E:ntract 15. ~fi=r ~f"5iJ~ ~ri1=11.=r: ~TcJcfiwi~cn.=r11=11.=r1 it erq~ \f T"{ f.=r1')~ .=rr.=;r~~:r,:rifr cfir=.rT ~Tf~~.=r t. .-!) t. cfi1~1=1l't t1fi=r -=qffflc=r: , ~ir.=nfli 1=1~T"{ltlf ~7.=r:;r1':l: ~r~cfcfiT f.;-qfc=rc=r: , l!o~~T~ ~~7fcfi n-==r ef1::~~ 1.fi1 "I I ;;~ffflo: I ~~7.{cfil' sf-q cfi'V:i cfi'1r1=1f-q ~. j~~~cr cJ.=r ~o: , ocn fG.~1j TGa~ ~~7,Jq;: ~T{TDf~T~.; n11=f"{ltlll;:ft' 1rft~1=1~ ~-e-~1-w) qfflcJi;J;;tG_ 1 Exercise 4K Why did Varddhamana set out towards Caschmere? Having filled his cart with various goods, and having yoked two bullocks to the pole, who set out towards Caschmere? Why did the bullock Sanjivaka frill? Having abandoned the bulloek, what did the merchant do? What was then done by the bullock? As the days went on, how did the bullock become fat and sleek in body? What did the bullock then do? Extract 16. ofi1=1~ cfi=f f-qWfflcfiwiTl=IT ftj{: ~1~Ttfrf'5St 'o0~~~1=fi=l'~7.fi;JT~ I 'G~cfi~T f-q-q-T~Tcfif~o: "QT.=r11i lHff 1'1=frl'Tcfi~1=fll1=fo I if;,.q o-==f ffi~rJT.;'i=f-,!:! ' . ~"-qi~ "Rffl1'trrJTJf~c=rf1=1cJ ~~1-a;cn.=rf~o1=1"9;flfcJ 1 Cs. n~HIT -qr;:;~ircr1FiT ~-=qfcti'ff -qf"{c1~ BJ~.=r-1=1171~ fcfif1tG.f1=1~TfflT~ aes.l(!f1 f~c=r: 1 oUJT-fcJli: cfil:?cfi~1=1rlcfil~T wl=l~-==IT~i ~Tfl'ffll\ill
PAGE 68
60 SANSKRIT FIRST LESS0N8. ~: I "fi' nmfcflf ~l{;;cfi: cfi"(Gcfi1=1T~ H~ 'cfilicli fq;fi=r~"G,cfil~'Y ~1=11' -q1;;llf1=t~TFH 1=1~1=1qf
PAGE 69
EXTRACT XVIII. 61 l.friT l:rl:rT~T'{~ffl ,.~ l:r~T'rl''{: I f~";n fql.RlG.~;:j Bnfl=I'~ ,. 'ij,"if1fcr, l=l'~T~'{T .:Jcl'f~ 1 ooT Tf(~: Bcfiltfl:rT~ I ~T: 'Q'l'tffl:lll'rt l:{: ~Tfl=l'cfilr1ZITll
PAGE 70
62 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. w;ff-q l{'lfT ijq~;; ~ll{~cftfTG_T;:JT ii fci~ 'Rif'5fiil{[-a o~f-q 'Rllrc11T~ s ;;511-fq;:ry ~nfr.J~i:Jcf~ ,, q;j~~T7Tffi .. fil{ I Exercise 5!.. How did the jackal, Damanaka, go to the lion, Pingalaka? Was the jackal seen by the lion or not? What did the king then say? Has the king any occasion for a servant? If the king has no occnsion for a servant, then what is the use of Damanaka's coming? What does the jackal say here (-or in regard to this point)? When must attendance necessarily be made by a retainer? By whom must attendance necessarily be made when the time ( or a fit occasion) has arri,ed ? By \\ ham was this assertion made ? To whom was this assertion made by the jackal? The lion-king and Dnmanaka, the jackal, have a Jong conver sation, and Damanaka gets into great favour at court. But he thereupon becomes about as selfish as his brother; and, on his return from his audience, he narrates a story with much the flame moral as that which his brother had narrated. It here follows. E.xtraci 18. ~~~r~1::Ttfif ~~G_nJl~;:ryf1;1 'Q'lfl l{~Tfqsfi1={l ..!) " ;:JTi:f ftj~: I o~ 'q'focfi~'{i:f'N~T;:J~ ~W'{ll;I lef'-qq;: q;f~~;;f~ I B' fij~: ~~'{11;{ ~;:i' ~lfT '--!lq cfiftffil fctct~T~Tfci lnl:fc1i1RiJ.:fl{T;rf sf~~11o I ..!) ' fcfi fciiT'lf~~ 1 om :qri:r TJFIT ~ft.Tq;~;;Tl{T fc1~lilT i:1iBm~it~ B'~Tllf 111r~TG_TrfT'lf l.fo: 1 ' oo~f~'lfT•lif~ctiT qf~ii f.:r:Bl:fo 1 "ff.:fTBT ftjfr "~o~W'{: ~fttfo ! l!f'E!cliW~ 'lf~T 'lfG_T ~tfo
PAGE 71
EXTRACT XIX. (l3 o~ o~T Bfq'iJl:j fc1?1~ i:JTBH;:-f~~T~rf tj~ 'll'fo 1 ~~cfi~ B i:ifl:lcti: lijt11-q1ftm GJf~: ~r~i:~rr '" l~T~rr~~ lTI~T aq1-q1f~o: ~Tf~o'Sij I B ftj{t 'll'~ cfi~Tf~~fq ~fl:lcfi~~.; ~9.ill";T cR)'qlf(J'fT~-C'-. ";TTo fcrs1~~1~11::"G.1~ 1=1~TG_1::T GJ~q 11 ' C'-. Exercise 52. Who nibbles the ends of the mane of the lion sleeping iu the cave of the mountain ? What did the lion think, having per c.:iived th6 ends of his mane nibbled ? Not catching the mouse, which had gone into its h<;>le, is the lion angry or not? Having gone to the village, what does the lion do? Does the mouse then, for fear of the cat, come out ? How does the lion sleep, when his hairs are not injured? Whenever the lion hears the sound of the mouse then what does he do? Why does the mouse, on one occasion, come out? Coming out, by whom is the mouse caught? And further, when the lion never heard the sound of the mouse then what did he do ? Damanaka, however, sticks to his plan of acting towards the king as loyally as he conveniently can,-due regard being had to his own interests ;-and at his next audience he finds occa sion to tell the king the following story ? Extract 19. ~fur '9ll~R1=1UJ il'~"9:o~'lj .=JTJ~~ I ~cfi~T rr11=1 11foc1~01fo '51'rrt1c1T~: '9;1'1.l~ I l!cfi~l ~~li"T~T'll' 1:{~Plli"Trf: cfif'SijlflU ~11hg a1:nq1f"G_o: 1 o~rn;uqfrroT t:r~ 7.tTrr'l: t1T1;1T I if 'qlrfU~T ~~Ti:J~~ 7.tl"G_~f~ I ociT ',!) .=JTJ~~~i{r!'"Q:J: lTf"G_ffi ~: ffln~ ~~17.t~ ',!)
PAGE 72
64 SANSKRIT FI UST LESSONS. ~a I ~.=r~t ~Tcfi~: cfiftfoT i:J;:Jllflwi ~Tefo c,... ' ~T'Si ~.n~fo s_~~ ~.=rT: rl71Uo ~1-,.. ' f'lfnl: I on: cfi'{T~'ll'T rl'Ti:J q~!fT fcf~'ll' i:J~'ll t. ~i cfl ~11f~ 1:
PAGE 73
EXTRACT XX. 05 Extract 20. G_ii;;cfi: 1 f q;1=1~ fcf~lf~ 1 ~m:r~nt "'1i -eytt: I ,.,f-q ~if -qfi:~q;;~ryf":qn1=t I ~~ct'T 1i ~tt: ~~-q;;1=1;;f~ol=f 1 -~ fqm:lf i . ' f1=1~ 1J~T s.:Jlf): m~r( l=f~T cfinl::?t o~ ,.,f-q qff~: I cfil?cfiT llR I ~~7.f ~~fllcfi: cfi1>.l ~~f11?t I G_l=fi=fcfi '-" I ~-qy11f•~;;J"l[! I o~T~T'ffi1=1 1 ' ~-q1if;; f~ 11~~ .=r -q1:1sfi~: c&TcfiT cfi.:Jcfi~~~ ,~B~1=1tiTo"ll~ 11 'cfil::?oli: ~fo I cfi'V:litoa I G.1=1;;cfi: cfi~fc=r I cfi~"H~ ' f~rt c=ru qT1fB~~ff1 f;:rq~o: 1 air)~1-q~1f.; ~~l::Tef~o,TilIT~Tf~ ~Tf"G.oTf.=r I on: qllf~T 11~ 1f1=1~ ~~oT1=11.i ff~: I ~'::r 1Jlqc! i.i~Btf~Tq~Tq~! ~~fa: cfi~Tf~efq;; ~fqllffo l 1(0: I ~T .Jp;qJ ~i fi:r-==r --l~~ffl~T1fcfi! I B~if~ 7Ti cJT~T 'R~{q;; ~1JJ1(! II (. . l. " Exercise 54. "What is to be done here ?"-who says that? By whom was said, " This is a fault committed by myself" r' Where t.he fault is one's own doing, is complaint proper or not? Where is lamentation improper? Having reflected for a moment, what does Damanaka say ? How is it possible to divide ( or estrange Ii
PAGE 74
(i6 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSO::fS. from one another) those of whom there is a great natural affec tion? Who says-" An expedient is to be thought of" ? Is all that possible by menns of force, which is possible by means of expedients ? Who kill e d a black snake by means of a golden necklace ? Where do the crow and his mate dwell ? By whom were the crow's young one's eaten? Why does the female crow say-" My lord, let this tree be quitted"? Is there any doubt that dwellin(J' in a house where there are snakes, is death simply? ., What-like is a servant who gives (pert) answers ? What else (besides these, is entitled to be called) death simply ? Extract 21. cfT'lfm il'ff l fii~ .; ~;:J I q1i;: 7.fT't 1=tln~ Cs " ~T~Tl,f: ~TG: I ~l.:JT 13,.;~ eJtft 6Q: I ql'lf~~ cfi~';t.; ~~7.fnl ~~tf.; ~i ~.; m~flJ'ff ... " "' ~1=1,q: I qf'lJ~) il?f I ~~1=1'.:flJT f~'lfl I 'lfn: I Cs 'a'fa'~~ Gf~ f ii'if~ cfiffi Gf~l=f I s_!') s!)'s!') " Q~,'lf ftjif ~l=J~: ~W~ii f.;lff'@o: II clfT~~ 1 c1~no 1 7.f1'lf~: c111'lffn 1 " Exercise 55. Who says-" My dear (wife), it is not to be feared? Whose great offence had been again and again borne by the crow ? Is the black snake again to be forgiven ? Is the crow able to contend with a powerful black snake, or not ? " Enough, ( or have done) with this anxiety "-by whom was this said? If strength belongs . to him who has intellect, then whence (should be) any strengh of the unintelligent? What sort of lion was killed by the rabbit? Of the very headstrong lion, killed , by the rabbit, by whom was the story told ?
PAGE 75
EXTRACT XXII. 07 Extract 22. 1=r~1::.=rrf'i -qj~ .;n=r ftj~: 1 B";;f -qw.;t ~l.i fc1G_t.n.; l!cfT~ 1 cro: ~: -qfw.:J-.!) iffflcii cfi?ff ftjit fq~: I ~q BW"QW~\f: ,c. -.!) fs61tif I Gf1TirGf ~c.RJ~Dij "Q~lj"QiJcfi-1TT1=J: I ftj~.;)~;:r I 11q)'rr~f~~ .Jcfol of~ .J7fff I ' -~ c=rc=r:ll.rfrr ~i:t~cii -q~-qcfif~a ~"ef1t";;IT~ 1 ,c. ~-.!) ~1:1 cifi~Tf-;;ro cifi~Tf-q 7.flf~~cfi~ qJB'{: trrR: I ' ~. oo: m sf~1To I '=afTB~orf~.;TfcRff fs61T"ff ~1fct-' -.!) "ffl~1TT I "Q"Siiii{ ~IDl=J"QfTfi:r f~ ftj~1.;.;11.; it II -.!) oll~ ll~l=f"QTf~Tfi:r I c=rrr: ftjit sfq ~tfT"QT~o: -.!) cfiT"QTo ol=fcfT':q I qjrJ~rt fctffl1il~T7l'ITT sfB I ~~cfiT ' -!I -.!) sifqlct I ~l=f"QUlf: llf'lf ftj~~l!J ~ffll~"ff: I o~Htf "Q"ii1::T7T1=f.=rT1T ~-qv.f cfiii.rT ~1fi=r;:f f.=r~G_flf-,c. o1=f";JTTfffi s fii:r I Exercise 56. In what mountain does the lion, named Durdanta, live? Who remains always, in the mountain named Mandara, perpetrating the slaughter of the beasts ? Having made a meeting, what was done by all the beasts? "My lord,-why is the slaughter of all the beasts made ?''-by whom was this asked? Who (will undertake to) supply a separate beast daily for the food of the lion? "If such be the choice of you, Sirs, then be it so,"-by whom was this said? And to whom was this said? Thence forward who continues eating each day the beast assigned? Of w horn, on one occasion, did the turn ( to be eaten) arrive ? Having seen his own turn arrived, what did the old rabbit
PAGE 76
68 SANSKRIT FI UST LESSONS, think? By him who has hopes of life, (in respect) of whom is submissiveness made (or shown)? "What have J to do with conciliating the lion ?"-by whom was this said? Who will here go to destruction (-a resolution into the five elements, earth, water, air, fire, ether-)? Who approaches the lion very leisurely? What did the lion say to him ? Did the lion, pained with hunger, address him with anger, or not? What did the rabbit say? Extract 23. f~{: Bcfil'q1=[~ I B~t 7fr=.l'T 1=1i ~~"lf ~TBT frr~frr I no: ~11'cfi~ Tf{T~T 711):{~h:cfitr{,ll{Ttrl=IPlo: 1 l, c-. ~~TTf~ ~" ~11=11'~1 of~~ qitf~~ a~cf .... Cs t1fof~ ~f~ocfl.:f I o'ffi sQT ~"qTU:JTrRa'~Tefl:: ' ~T~Trf f.=rf~izr tr5il'rt Tfo: I ~ill s ifq1fif ~'R. 1 crr11~1 if~ , ~'ff 1=111r I cfii~ot ,., I 'q"ll:f~ scf~cf_ I fw:r ~TB~ Q'{fB 1]~~: BooTif~ ~Tfo I ffil:1=1'~ tl'~~ d'~WT~GfoTfr"fi' cfi.=fcfiB':si -:q~ ~T.=fT1ITf;1=1.; 'cfiTGt l.Jfi::~fB I c:1 t, "' cfi~Tf~o ~cliQ";i l'Cff~ B~llf ~(f 'Rfq~ ' ~11~T o~.:rf~ol=I I qj.=fcfiB~T'iiB~1Utrcrl: ~' Cs.~ t, u~~tr: f~1=1tl!J: cfi&JJBtr1 ~trrf~ct: 1 t, ~ffi "{ ifcfTf1=1 I ~tfl~.:f f{ 'll~~i:r~Tf~ I cfi~G
PAGE 77
EXTRACT XXIV. 69 Having taken the lion, near what did the rabbit come? Having come there, what does the rabbit say? In the water of the well, what did the rabbit point out ? Then how did the lion go to destruction ? Having heard this, what does the female crow say? "Tell thou what is to be done,"-hy whom was this • said? Who bathes in the neighbouring lake? From whose person was a golden chain put off, at the time of bathing? Having seized the gold chain in her beak, where shall the female crow place it ? Having i,laced the gold chain upon what-did the prince go in to bathe ? Then by whom was that accomplished ( which had been directed by the crow) ? By whom was the black snake killed ? "May thy paths be prosperous !" -by whom was this said, and to whom? Damanaka goes to Pingalaka and succeeds in raising suspicions of intended treachery on the part of the ox-whereupon the lion kills the blameless bullock ; and thus is effected 'The Separation of Friends.' We proceed to THE THIRD BOOK, ON WAR. E.r:tract 24. 0::. "Q;:r: cfi1lfl1::ll-lcfiT~ ~T~Q":f~~ I ~llllf ~T~-q-;JT O ' .._., cJ"li rrft1;1~ '9;(f(t' ;:r: cfio{~l=lf~ 1 fc1~t-1=117.f1~ , ,~, ,.., .. "lJ~cf ~cflijl ma ?fi-.fi~llTfJ:J I fet1;1~: 9;{"lJ"fft 1l~T-c--. "lJl=JT~: ~fqi: I tfl: l=l"ll"(T~f fcJ1;1i n~fcf~ r-. ,_!) fcf'PJT~ cJTf'5ifnT: ~~n: cfil~: t~f1::l=IR_~ II Exercise 58. Of whom is it a pleasure to hear of war? By whom was this said ? At what time was this said ? What did Vishnu sarma then say? "Just what is relished by you, Si1s, that I rclate,''-by whom was this said? " Let war he heard," --by
PAGE 78
70 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. whom was this said ? To whom was it said ? By whom, having stayed in the abode of the enemy, were the swans deceived ? Having trusted whom-were the swans deceived? What sort of war was that of the peacocks with the swans? Extract 25. S$1f~ ii~~TnT~ lri#r~ctiT1fi fc1w1~: w1~1-~: , o"::T f.::rfirn.=rr~)~ -qf~~: ~.::r q-qr~ftr f.=rctB"Rl I rJT~~~f~ct ~~-qG~T'i_?I' ;:J.:(~~ ~ru~"\-ir~nr cJ_f-e-~~ct , om cn.::r~i~~o~ s eJf~oT~ morir.=t. cfiitl'it"fiilrJcf~T~ tfreJ'f ~i:t I .:(l cfTrJ~T: ~~
PAGE 79
EXTRACT XXVI. 71 said by the birds? How were the nests of the birds constructed ? Are the birds possessed of hands, &c.? Who are possessed of hands, &c. ? Having heard the speech of the birds, what was thought by the monkeys? Whom do the birds blame ? '' Let there only be a cessation of the rain "-by whom w~ this said? By the monkeys, having ascended the tree, what was done ? Extract 26. 'i[TfTffl! cfiPlfci_ ~~lfT .:fTfUtfT~ ~1=(~ ;:frffl~r;$:.n.=r~1~ f.;qfno: 1 t1~T~f'lfT'cll=l'~1=1,q: t1Hf ~TtJ,11 ;:f 1=frfcfo ft,qrr: I ;:ftfflt~T~Bfl' (.. ' ft:r.;y s~tT~v.fr'af ';iliiff tffi::~~: I offi sm c{;:f JTRTcJJR ';iJfflq~l=fcffflf qitrf':q~lfq_ I ~~f1=1~1.=ff ~~l=lcf~~lcJ{rf! fcfi~il 'ii ~ft.p:nfl=I' I (Q~T -.!) 'JJ.' llfflliiffl1' I ~Tfq~f cfrf~cfo1'T ~~.;n::ltlfu~ ~ri(~;=nf~ft1~: 1 ,!J 1=11=f I ~~~TsJ11T ,.fll=liiH~' ~~TI::: cfiT1lf: I ~TfTfflT~ (t' fcff~1lcfiJ1=1'c{ffll'qiJ ~T!'fWtJTrf I 1'~T~Ttf~o ~cf s~iirf 'sllit~ ~it.cf (~cf rf~1:.-;y1ft.t~ 'ff~ ~~elf 'ffffiij'w=f ~rfaf~~Pf~;;1f~~ ~rRro~ 1 Exercise 60. Who fell into the indigo-vat? Being unable to get up (-out-) again, what was done by the jackal? Who remained, having shown himself as one dead? In the morning what was done by the owner of the indigo-vat? What was then done by
PAGE 80
72 SA;ll"SKRIT FIRST LESsmrs. the jackal? Who, having gone to the forest, said, '' I am now of thP. finest colour"? What else was said by the jackal ? (According to his own aceount) by whom, and by means of what, was the jackal inaugurated in the empire of the forest ? '' Let the jackals behold my colour !"-by whom was this said? What therefore (-according to the jackal-) is to be done, from this clay forward ? Having made obeisance with a prostration of the eight members of the body, what did the jackals say ? Why did the jackals say this ? Of whom, over all the inhabitants of the forest, did the sovereignty become (established)? His superiority having been established, by whom was the jackal surrounded ( or attended) ? • Extract Zi. rrrr~.:r f~~;Jfl~T~~irqft:~.=rrrt 1u1ZJ . ~711-~.,cf~T~ ~"Ef.fT;:riilqsJT"lf ~u,nr: BfsJT'(f"l[: l offi f7.tttlgl.=t_ ~1TT~T;=f7iff-qq ~,TJT~;:r "Rf~Trl'~ 1 .fr f7.tttt~rr ~~ilr11r11fn~.=r 7.t'lf ;p.~1: im:1rrr: 1 s 'li .=r~"lff o n•.f"lfT f7.tl.t"lfl{ , "lfffi "~ ~nrr~~ ~.fT~f7.t"R~'aff I ~1~lrijTm ~T~rflH{ +f~~ 1 o?il~1i "ef1::-:qr"lf~ o~rr I o~--.!) l=frf~li "lf'lll cf~Tfi:{ I Blf B.urrBl=f1J ~FiltTT~ -.!I i:f~HT~l=lcfi~T cfif~izrv.r I oo~ ~~l=fTcfi~ ~~7.\"Tf{ "' <:: rr;:rr, 1.t 1 ~n: 1 "lf f~ "lf~ o~TBT ~fcrifllf: 1 "lff fslill~ l::T~T B f~ ii 1"l~"qrf~l{ II on: ~~1f~s11"lf ~Tlfl!J ~~all: , o~T ,.~ftR Bfo ~~'1~11
PAGE 81
EXTilAC'l' XXVIII. 73 Exercise 61. By whom were lions, tigers, a11d other pre-eminent courtiers obtained? By the jackal-having done what? Again-having done what? What was then promised by an old jackal ? By an old jackal-having bel1dd what-w,~s this promised r By what were the tigers, &c. deceived? Not having known what-do they (the tigers, &c.) suppose this (one) a king? In order that this may be unde1stood, what is to be done? Having heard the voice of the jackals, what was done by the jackal:' It having been thus carried out, what took place? Extract 28. ~~"ll"T~r"ll"r -qf~ ~~rJ:rfl!l.:fn=r ~f~"ll": 1 rlrf ,., t1t=nf~;;1 cfiP-1~~.; .:JTrGJt~~ri~~Tl:t'fl!lf~-.~TU-c;-fl.fo: I oo! ~il!ltfl'q'l sBT Bf~ ~1lcfo: JmT~T~:r~vit.l!lTf~: I ~1=1~ tflrf~q ~Tt cfiHfllrn ~;; ~7T~~1f~ f.;~"ft 1 onT ,~ " t. t. "lfl:iq111?t f~~cii trrwl1i -q~"lff~ ?t frr~~ ~TJ~"R--., -!> ~T~-:qJ ~frTlllfB I -arr) sBT f~~cfi: (l(~To ~cfl!f-,, " -!I ~cfi~WT ~fciizrfo 1 ~;; rt "lfT"q~T~ ~fcf-~ , -!I izrf~ , -a~.,~t o~.; R? ct B'fu 0~~1=1 1 oo: ~11:-,., " cR1!ll"lfT;:Jla".=f iifft{rl;=f oFail:t'T~)~ f~"Rtol:t' I " ~T frrfl.fJ:JTlt~"lfli'q'T"lf: 1 o~~1=fiir-ai" fcii ;; ctRTf1=f 1 on:t1~frr ;;1f-qo J:Jfof~;:i ovnfcitt~TJ~~~: f ~T7T1=fii~ir~ff I l!cfi~T rlrf o~T 1n~) r~~cfiT -!I '~ ~7T~;; ~rn aQltfTI~o: I rlrfl'q'~Tl.f.=f m .s fq ;;rf-q{ft ,!) ' U~~lf~Tf~: -q~ 7Trf: II -!I
PAGE 82
74 SANSKRIT FIRST LEflSONS. Exercise 62. Ily the Kshatriya, named Chudamani, in the city (of) Ayodhya, what vision was obtained in a dream? With club in hand, and having done what, does the Kshatriya stand at the door of his own house? Whom shall the Kshatriya pitilessly kill by a blow of the club? Struek by the club, what does the beggar instantly become? Having witnessed all that, what was thought by the barber? '' Hallo I Tliis is the way to gain treasure !"-by whom was this said ? Why then does he not do the same? Thence forth what does that barber do? By whom, on one occasion was a beggar killed ? The Fourth and concluding book of the Hitopadesa is devoted to the subject of 'Peace.' It opens as follows:-Extract 29. lff: c1mn,~q;1m '{l'5f1:t~"! l fqi::J~: ~T s ~1=nf~: 1 ~rf.:trrl.f•=nf~t.fh~oTl=f I fcJ~1-~"' '-" ' '-" I ~'lJoT1=f I B~l=lf-q cfi~ll'Tfl=f 'lJ~T'lJl=JRl-' ' fflcli! I c1i l=l'~fo BWT1=1 1:TsJtf~~o~rf'lJ): I "' .. ~'lJTzj TJ'U~sfiTzj cfT':qT ~f~: cJi
PAGE 83
EXTRACT .X.XX. "/6 house of Apologue-the store-house on whic:h lmudreds of sub6equent writers have indented, with or without ac:knowledgment, -usually witl1out. Extract 30. ~cf1'~.=rTf1: ~cf~~T 'iiTJ:f I ~;:r ~~tr~~ucJ: JJT'R: , o~J:J1.rn:J1~r c... ~HJ~tf~cfil-~cfiTI:~ftfcfiT'lfl ~l!JTqIT~'fl': ~l{: I c.... -.!) ..!) ..!) oo: ~'(~T~ {~ ~J:JT~Tlllf~~"ll(f I "ll~~fJ:Jl=i ~wi~'(Tcf fars1a<1 cfi"q~cfiTrf trritf'J:J o~T ~ft{--.!) ' ~J:1'11 cfitf~~ll~~'(P~Tf ~cnJ:f"q'sfil1.l ~~cfNT ef ,!) , ~: tr.=r: -q;;: tJTJq~:nf~cfiJ:J-qsft"lf f~sli1'lf qTf-.u~ -..!) ._!J c-.. ..!) cfi~ T c_il~~~cfil.T;;T~~T~ f"efcfT{":qoV.lt cnOfl=l I ' ._!J ..!) oo~T~ 1:t(i[Ttf 'lfT ~'tl"llTcJ.=fcJo'l ~n=rftJcfil'iRlTf -.!) ..!) ..!) q;iffJ:J I oG_;;~t ~:r~rrii~1m: ~-q~ ~~)rlf 'lf~ ctift~f~ 0~ st cfiTtJTcfi&: ~~T: ~'Q~T'fflTJii=f -..!) ,., (fT~f~llfTfi:J I S:~f.:Jtfflr if;; c_ilTf~: J:Jf~~: ~~W-..!) -.!) ucJ~~at ~1~1f;,':q ~7;;1f;; 1 oat 11l"i=f.:r1~~q-C'-~l~lT(~ qil+lcfiR~ ~~'QcfiHf--.!) f{:
PAGE 84
76 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. Extract 31. ~l-~'lf~T i:tnt~ iiTl=I 'fil'T'~T~: I 'ff~ lff~T ._!) ~ . ~TfflT~~~ ifT~l:r~r'Qf "if'ff Tf'ffT I ,., ifT~~ cfi'ff ~l sJ: tfT~'9;tTt ~Trfl={TTJ'ffT :if-;:J: I rt l{f ifT~~: B~:if tfTf
PAGE 85
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE VOCABULARY. ins., instrumental, or 3d case. \ (Nos. 50, 113,115, and 116.) loc., locative, or 7th case. (Nos. 113, &c.) du., dual. (Nos. 104 and 106.) d., crude or uninflected state. (No. 1, p. 3). s., substantive. vb. verb. par., parasmui-pada. (This is the technical name of the affixes, of the active voice, exhibited under No. 118. For an explanation of the name, see under atm. -here fol lowing.) ut111 .. ,,_{iJmane-J2!!,da. (No. 91. Purasmai-pada means 'an expression for another,' and utmane-pada means ' an ex pression for one's self'. The utm. affixes are therefore -analagous to those of the Greek Middle. They are exhibited in the Vocabulary under the word iira brute.) " cl., class or conjugation. (Nos. 15, 93, and 96-103.) caus., causal form. This form is very similar to that of the 10th cl. (See No. 103.) a_qt., agent, noun of agency, or verbal acijecti ve. pot., potential. (No. 133.) ind. pret. part., indeclinable preterite participle, or conjunc tive partieiple. (See No. 59, and also, in under the avalolcya). the Voeabulary, word 'l.!J
PAGE 86
VOCABULARY, SANSKRIT AND ENGLISH. a. 'mli1:cf1!. l st per. sin. lst piet. nf the vb. 'qi 8th cl. pm. Do, make, ~i!_ 3d pers. sin. 'ill~n 71ass. part. (of the vb. llJm, Kill, injure, nith p1iv.) V n injured. ;.q~i,: nom. sin. m. of 'l'l'~I, adj. Unable. 'il'I'~ 3d pers. sin. 3d pret. ef the vb. 1llJ ] st r;l, 71ar. Go. 'il'l'lI s. n. The front, point, extremity. "'l'ir Zoe. ind. Before, in presence df. 'il'l''Qliilfit 3d 11ers. si11. 1st pret. of tnfii ( causal Jonn of the vb. ~ii, slay), He caused to be killed. 'l?fjf: s. n. A limb, member. The body. 'il'l''Rlrnll''t 3d pers. szn. lst pret.
PAGE 87
80 SANSKRIT fl!UST LESSONS. ~ ind. Immediately,afterwards. ' >!l.flll ins. sing. f. rif ~;ii:. pron. This.-'iflf!: gen. du. 111. >!lottfifi{ Impolitic, silly. ind. Every instant, con tinually. ~r{~Tif 3d pers. sin. pres. (of tlte " vb. 1TJf 1st cl. par. Go, n,ith '\!'I~, After) Follows. '\!iotf~nll nom. sin. 11. adi. Improper. " '\. ;J ;;J~~~: 3d JJCrs. pl. 2d pret, par. (,!f the 1,b. 11i:r Gn. with '\!i'il, " After ) They followed. '\!i~~l~ agt. A follower, dependant. '\!i.if~, nom. or acc. sin. 1!f '1!1iiR .~. n. Interval, distauee, difference. At t.he end of a 1vord it may be ren dered by Another; as ~~T;;n::, Another country ; ~~'QfiiR1 Ano ther man. "l!'l''iiflTil' pas.,. 11ari. Gone within, in cluded in illd. Near. "l!'I'~~ ind. One with another, mutually. '\!i~ nom. sin. s. 11. otr~pring. "l!'f'q'1T~ occ. 711. qf' '\!i~l:. Other, '\!i'q''(l~ '.1(1). Cul pa ble. ';!I~,'{~ s , m. Civility. ~1_ num .. ~in. Not seeing. '\!i'il~~: ins. Jil. m. By those enNos. 125 and 38. " joying or experiencing. '\!i1~ JJass. pa'l'I. Experienced, felt. ,;g~~~ifl~ 3d pers .. ~in. imJJ. pass. (No. 13:2, of the vb. Be, with "!!'it, No.130. ) Let it be enjoyed. " ~11:171: 11orn. sin. s. m. Love, affection. '\!i'ilfaW Zoe. s'in. n. Done, executed. " "!1:lWlP! Jut. pass. 71art. (of tlte vh. llT ivith ';!!'if.) To be done, or ac" complished. '\!i:flll:~ s. n. A following, a going after. '\!iilofilll ind. In many ways. '1!1~ ius. si11. rn. or n . (oft_~~ 71ron.) By or with this, him, or it. '\!i,if~ ind. Inwardly, within. "!l~'Q~ 1st 71ers . sin. 1 st. pret. ( of the vb. ist cl. par.) I saw. .;_q a
PAGE 88
VOCABULARY. 81 no•n. .1i11. m. ITT!:lurr s. f. Name of the capital of RAMA, Ayodhya, the modern Oude.-tll'I',_ loc. sin. "!'!Ul_t!Ti'il 110m • . 1in. s. f A large forest. 'i!'ln.:. s. m. An enemy. 'i.!1~1( acc. sin. m. A thing, wealth, meaning. i1ul. For, on account of. 'i!'lit1fa: 110m •. ,in • . ,. f TATP. Increase of wealth. 'i!'lizff nom. sin. m. oj 'i!'lf~'i'{_ (jJ-om the vl1. 'i!'lit, Ask), Asking, beg ging. 'i!'lfitr11 ius. s. 'i!'f~){~Ti(' pres. part. (of the vb. I st cl. atm. Gain, with '-'I pri'V.) Not gaining, or getting hold of. 'i!f~lf al{j. Lazy. '-'l siding. ~!!
PAGE 89
82 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. and 'II priv.) Not having delibeinteri. Aha I rated, witho11t due.deiiberation. mte1:iAh ! Oh ! Alas! ~~Trlfl (t. WT 7nep. To, at, as far as, until, When 11re.fixecl to a noun, it 90-1:erns the nbl. 01 acc. case. Pre.fixed to verbs denoting Giving and Going, it imparts to them the sense of Taking and Cominir. (No. 130). WT~ ind. p,-et. pa rf, (lf~ .~. m. A rat, or a mouse. ~TJTir: nom .. , in. J1CtSS, 71art. (of!!!, Go, mith ~T, No. 130), Come, arrived. i!td. pret. pni;J, Having come. (5ee Nos. 59 11nd 60, and also, in the vocabulary, under the word 'i!i
PAGE 90
VOCABULARY. 83 ~m.nqtJfn 3d sin. of ~nfq (caus. of '!IT), Inflated. 'i.l'!Tiftffi'f ins. sin. m, Brought, fetched. ( rt. ~l. Lead, with ~11.) acc. sin. of ";!11~ .~. f. Ca lamity. >!fltfloiPl' acc .. ~in. m. pres pa1t. (,!f 1t. 'lfl2d cl. par. Go, rvit.h ~1.-1vhich see), Coming, approaching. the forest. 'i!ll<:~, Let there be commenced. (See No. 132, rt. 1:)f lst cl. atm. Beg-in. Usually n:ith. 'i.lfT prefixed.) 'i!IT.::Tf'\ln: (rt. <:1\1, Complete, wit.It ;::!11 ), Conciliated. ";!!T~~, Having mounted. 'i!I~: nom. sin. m. pass. part. (No. 52. rt. ~~.) 'i!ITW, Afflicted, disturbed. (rt. "l ) ';!11~, Venerable, a friend. -'&l~lf"ln'{_, (It was) considered, seen fit. ";!!Tz;rr,;q, Having considered. (rt. ~)':;r, See.) ";!!T
PAGE 91
SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. •,nft:trnT: nom. pl. Stayed, dwelt 'l!JTI!' 3d sin. of "l!ll~ defective verb, Say. See <[: m. Food. ~ftf, Having called. r t. t. (See wq'~.) 't'H~n pass. pa1 t. Brought. i. ~f A desire. ~fiif, They desire. ( rt. ~1', i1'7f{/ if iraf;r, No. 38 . ) ~fir in il. Thus. to this effect, so : saying. This particle is used 1vhen the ve,y 1vords or thoughts of another are given, ansn : e1'iny the purpose of the inve,ted comma; as m~flffn ~ii' (Be' ' ing asked) ' Who is there?' he should say 'I.' (No. 90.) nom. or acc. sin. n. This. ~, Here, in this world. ~l'l'lf Zoe. sin. Here, now, at such a time as this. \11R, A lord, master. Q pass. pa1t. (rt. "1"-1'), Spoken. (Nos . 53 and 95.) ~. They two said (indej. past. part. No. 126.) ~, Having said. (No. 61.) '1~ ind. Up, aloud . ~rl!1mf p1es. part. Flying. (rt. ii", Fly, 4t!t cl. atm., wit!t '1if, u, •. ) ' '1~ m. Superiority, elevation. ~, Highest, best. Impertinent, giving (pert) answers. '1'iR' nom. 01 ow. n. Answer, reply. '1~ s . f The north. '1'iRllf1r s. 11. The north, the northern road or course. Arise, get up. (rt. lJT, Stand.) 'a'~~, (No. 124), To get up. ~~fl'l', I raise. (~Tflf .cau.~. witlt '1~, 1v!tich always 1equire.s the initial l!'_ to be dropped.) 'a'j"q(ilf ind. JJl'et. pa, t. Havin g lifted, or picked up. '1"1Ttf, Having arisen. ( See pre ceding word.) '1~f;rii.r ins .. ~in. pass. pa,t . (1. lfil', Fall, 1L'ith ~ Up), Springing up. '1i'nlr, Having raised, accumulr.ted, (j1'o,n q1~ caus. of lfG", Go, ri:itlt ~' Uv). ~'iii, Having abandoned. (rt. 1''if, • Create, witlt 'a-ii'). ' n. Water. ~,iff', Desirous of water.
PAGE 92
VOCABULARY. Mad. (rt. 1ll'G, Be proud.) ~~if, Prepared, made, (from 'rt. "fq, Be able). ~"Q11iltf, Having bought. (rt. 'il\l, Buy.) ~q"l'IJtf m. Waste, loss.
PAGE 93
86 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. par. Say, declare. relate.) ~l(nJ 3d pers. sin. c!i"ll.f. A story, tale, fable; narrntive. cli'Jllif, T t is told or declared. ( N oS. ~-c!if~W, Name of a district on the Coromandel coast, extending from below Cutta!t to the vicinity of 111 adra.~. 10:1. 91.) cli'Jllimf, Let (it) be told. I q;fii:jf,ign Zoe. sin. rn. of nir.ii[, ri::1, ------" ' (No. 132.) pron. A certain. (Nos. 86 and onGJf'
PAGE 94
VOCABULARY. nom. 01 acc. sin. n. ,v110 ? which i' what? ind. why? what! whether. (No. 85. Obs. It is often am11loyed 1vith the force merel!J of a note of inter?"Ogat'ion) When ~flf is suldoined, it give . ~ an in determinate seme,-tlms , fclil'ffq, Somewhat, some, any, any thing; soever. Tqil'f~1f ind. On what account ? ' fcfif1ffn ind. How so? What's this? fctit:ilGiifi s. f. Rumour, on dit. mi!_ adj. Some, a little. How long? Wm. A dog. cliil'l'f ind. Whence ? wherefore? ... ' ~sfq, Somewhere or other. ( See ... unde1 fq;~ . ) cli~ n . Eagerness, joy, curiosity. ... "' ~flfn, Ang-ry. (11a.~s. part. of~) m. A jar
PAGE 95
08 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. ~flJ, I eat. (rt. 'l
PAGE 96
VOCABULAH.Y. ml!'ra, He thinks. reflects. (rt. I S'l1!, n. Another lake. ~~t( in. f'iln lOtlt cl. par.) -t(f'fl' 3d A lake. pl. f;ef;aif pass. pait . f-.fiif.(lq ifl7Tf~, He awake s . (rt. 'it'll] 2d cl. fur, pass. part. par.) ifT1T~trf~ c1111s. Thou dost f'il'fl'T f. Thought, care waken. f"f(cfii~"Qlf(!5il', Cherished for a long ifTil' pas .~. part. Born. (rt. if'if, Ile time. TATP.(rt.'QT(!510th cl.pa1.) born.) 'i!'Til'fcfllll~ 8AHUV. Having ~T j Top, summit, crest. 'tTI'ff~ m. TATP. A jewel in a crest or diadem . '
PAGE 97
90 SANSKillT FIRST LESSONS. 1(~, Him. (No. 81.) ~~ifl'l 3d sin. imp. J!llSS, (No. 132) ~: nom. si . n. rn. A tree. nu: gen, ;r(t loc. if~ acc. pl. ~! Zoe. pl. if~il~ u. TATP. The foot of a tree. nf~ couj. Then. ~ The lower part, bottom, foot. ifror.t_ Zoe. sin. m. 01 n. ( of ~, No. 81.) He, she, it, that. if~ dat. sin. f if~n: ab/. 01 gen. sin. f nls•wmr 3d sin. 2d JJ1'et. of ifs, 10th cl. 7Jar. Beat, castigate. nTfflif 1st cl. par. Abandun. ":llf n . in compos. A set of three; a.~, ~.r,:r;llf, The three worlds, i. e., "' Heaven, Earth, and Hell. ":IHI' m. Fel!r, fright. ":!Tfn, Frigfa ened. pass. part. ~f .nfll caus. of vb. ":l~, Fear. jq'l, Thou. (See No. 81.) G da. ef~ adj. Southern. ef e,~T sf The south. G"f~~ n. The southern road or course. ~. Having given. (3d cl. par. rt. ~; .~ee No. 61.) Gf'f n. Curds. ~fVcli{!i in. Curd-ear (name of a certain cat). G'i:r,:fci, Name of a certain jackal. G"Rfill nom. du. m. DWANDWA, Wile and husband, a wedded pair. G"lt m. Pride. G"~m m. A mirror . G"if.r n. Sight, vision. G~ 2d sin. irnJJ, of Gf)l( ccm.~. of ~See (No. 38) ~1'if 3d siri. "' . c,. unp. Glllfil nom. -~in. pres. part. (No. 125.) G'Mif pa.~s. JJart. Gf~~ no111. sin. in. ind~f puss. pu1t. (No. 12fl). ~ftrr;n ind. pret. part. Girl' n. A gift. Liberality.
PAGE 98
VOCABULARY. 91 n. Poverty. fi:_1~~ DWA:-IDWA. From quarters and countries (comp. + ~J. -" . m. 'l'ATP. The subjugation of a country. Gllf adj. Long. ind. n. Deeply. GT~
PAGE 99
92 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. A name (No. 9 ). ind. By name, indeed. Often an emphatic pa1'ticle. if11''l n. A name. This word most u.sually occurs as the last membe1 of a Bahuvrihi 01 adjectival compound (No. 107). iJTllT nom. sin. m. ;::rt'lliJ'f_ acc. lllTV lac. fil:'ltil' adj. Lonely (f~, Without, and 'il'iJ, People) fire~ inrl. V nmercifully. fili'~ adj. Senseless. fiflli:gen. si11~ "' fil'~l:11 ind, Excessively. ' f-.rtiin pass. part. Meted out, constructed. (rt. "1, Measure.) fiJ'qlif adj. Free from wind, sheltered. .~. m. A calm. f.fffl:tlq adj, Same, like, having no difference. fil'frl' adj. Happy, at ease. f;:i=n1f[, He dwells in. (1t. cf~, Dwell.) f.rcraf;a 3d pl. fif~~il'~ nom. sin. n. Word was brought or sent. (rt. f,{~, Know. caus.) fffl, Motionless. f~il pass. part. Smitten, slain. (rt. ~ii, Sluy.) fil~~i{lfl: gen. du. m. BAHUV. Having their armies slain, or greatly cut up . il1? m. A nest. iJljq(, Havin!!" conducted. Huvincr -., passed ( a space of time). (rt ~l, Lead.) adj. Black, or dark blue .. •. 11. Indigo (the dye). il1~
PAGE 100
VOCABULARY. 93 Qt 111,. Mire, a slough. Zoe. acc. sin. of ab8 .•. n. (from tisa~, Five), Death (i. e. reduction to the state of the five separate elements, of whose aggre gate the body consists). 'Q? m. n. Cloth, a web. n. A heap or multitude. A coat-. "" . l ing or covenng.-(!5'! 1.11s. p . "qnrif pass. 7mrt. vf 'lfif, Fall. lliifl f. A wife. 'qr,qT ins. llf'l!fif. m. A road. q~ Zoe. q~ n. The foot. Place, station. A degree, step. Post, rank. nom. pl. !I?, Travel.) Q~ltliflii pies. JWrt . Fleeing. (rt. >.!'111', 1 st cl. titrn. Go, 1vit Ii. -qu, Dack, the\ being changed to ~.) "q(!5'Tii:rn pass. part. "qlfl in. A beast. "q'lf~ acc. 711. -q;nf~: " ~ " " ills. pl. "q~T~ gen. pl. "ql!JTi!:_ ind. After, afterward~. Behind. ~tl'Tflf, I see. (1t. l'lfl, No. :38.) ~11' 2d sin. imp. Behold. qr?f(!5''Q"'SATif'\nf BAHUV. Named P:i.-..., taliputra (a city, see No. 107, supposed tv be tlie ancient Palibotltra and tl,e modern Patna). qyfor m. The hand. qrfrrrr pas.~. pait. '?/'1iTfn(rnu.~. of'Qif, Fall), Made to fall, thrown down. ifTG nt. A foot. lfTi'iT1I' 11. Water ( jitt. z1art. z1ass. vf 'QT, Drink, No. 127). qy;:,q, 0 traveller! qr.~ i11.~. "ql~, More, or very, wicked. (compar.
PAGE 101
94 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. 'Q'l~ m. A snare, fetter. 'Q'l~{~ BA nuv. Snare-in-hand. adj. Tawny. yellowish; hence f'!fW(!S
PAGE 102
VOCADULARY. 95 'A~ pass. 7Ja/'t. Going on, begun. Ensued. Engaged, occupied, busy. (rt. 'el'n, Be.) wtf~n pass. part. of ( caus. of fcr~, Enter), Made to enter. 1H11G m. Favour, kindness, brightuei;s. pass.pa1'1.Asleep, slept. (rt 'Lcf'q). 'Qffl m. A stone, rock.-1'.: Zoe. ba.
PAGE 103
96 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. 1-f blta. lil:}flti
PAGE 104
VOCAilULAllY. 97 )i•"l uc(j. Formidable. lil'il'r( n. Food. The act of eatio~ (rt. ~.) fut. 7iart. JJass. To be eaten. s. n. Food ; store of provisions, lfll:! inter:j, Ho! hark ye ! ~llf, ind. A vocat-ive particle of respect, Ho ! f:l }//.(1, ii-~fironT .f. A shed. -cliTllT' lac. 'II!, or 11. A ring;, a circle. 'lfn f The mind. Opinion, resolution. ii-~ m. Pride. Joy. Desire. RUl n. The middle, midst. Jl
PAGE 105
98 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. fuirrr 3d sin. pnt. ,!f the preceding l:l:Jc'i m. A guardiun, protector. red1. 1:~1 f. Protection. m. A washerman. tl ya. t(~ m., A demigod, attendant chiefly on KuvERA, the god of wealth, and employed in the care of his gardens and treasures. t1liJ'PJ.:: m. KuVERA (the lord of the Yalishas). tlit_ ind. Because, since. That, to the following effect, saying. m. Effort, exertion, pains. tf'l!l'l ind. As. So as. How . t('q'lot;T~ ----' hul. As is proper to act. 1',n-!~ ind. Happily. tl~ ind. If. tl~ f The mer Yamuna ( or Jumna). gen. sin. m. 01. n. of re[, " pron. Who, which ((f. No. 81). lfT~ 3d sin. imp. ( of tit 2d cl. pa1 . Go), Let it pass. Go to. t(lf is mritten for ,nri\ at the end rif a comJ101tnrl ?Vorel, a.~, nom. sin. ~ffl: , A great king. l:r.fQ":f 111. TATP. A king's son, a ~---prince. A man of the militury tribe, a rajpoot. Uif~~q m. A king's mun or serv~;--;;~ execu tive functionary. UifT nom . . ~in.
PAGE 106
VOCAilULAilY. 90 By name Laglwpatunalw (-i.e. who folls, or alights, lig:htly), ~if pres. part. atm. ,f ~r,r Gt h cl. atrn. ne ashamed, blush. ind. 711et. 71art. of~){ 1st. cl. lttm. Gain, obtain. f~~l imp Let him write or scratch. ( rt. 6th cl. por.) ~21, Covetous, greedy. ,n. A hunter. c?Sz;513' 3d .~in. 2d pret. of e,:ra, Roll, J • "' wallow. ~if JHts.~. part. of Cut. m. The world, mankind, people. zit~ rn. Covetousness, greediness. ~1-------.. ,. ~T'fl! TATP. Drawn by greediness.
PAGE 107
100 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS., ~, Having known, perceived, re cognized. (rt. m. Know.) f;f~ n. Wealth. f-er~ TATP, Desti--tute of wealth. f
PAGE 108
VOCABULARY. 101 f.t~, Having laughed. (rt. fut. pass. part. qf lfoti 5th cl. Laugh.) par, Be able. T!te passive fol"ln ~P.: m. A roumiog about for plea-of this verb gives to an assusure ; a temporary building for ciated infinitive mood a passive festal purposes. sense. 'fllJ m. A tree. n. The top ~, Knavish. of a tree. poss. part. (rt. ,ir), Done hap pened, s. n. A livelihood ; be haviour. ~. Old. in. A bull. <[flr .f Rain, wet weather. ~1 f. Time. ciFH.l!Jl"II(, Having set or placed. (,/. 1J1, Stand.) ~R m. Behaviour; the practice of the law-courts. ~n. Calamity, vice. Bewildered. ~lf, A tiger. cq'N', A hunter. a:rrinf~, Slain. pass. part. caus. (rt: ~, Go, with 'i.'11 . and f
PAGE 109
102 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. n. Hearing. ~T:g n. A funen1l ceremony. ~"Cl~n m. Name of a mountain, or range of mountains. ~i!_ ad). Illustrious. ~l'l~crtnGT: nom. pl. rn. TATP, The feet of your glorious majesty. m, Heard . (.,,t. ~. No. 38.) ,,, .., It is heard. T'ill~, Let it be heard. (rt. i, Hear ; Nos. 9 l und 132.) mn'f, T o hear• ,,, \ (No. 124.) fflt( BAHUV, Angry (See ~). m"CI'!:_ AVYA. Angrily. lfiii voc. s in. of l'R<1', A friend. (Tenninational adjecti-ot), ~umberi[lg, amounting to. ~T'f m.. War, battle.
PAGE 110
VOCAilULAH.V. 103 ~lfi-fT, A rival wife. '8qj,;q: noin, Jil. '8~ll1'_ Avn. With fear, timidly. ~flfoli ar{j. Exceeding, abundant. Ahle. lfl{Tl!Tif, Arrived, come. (1 t . lll, Go.) (See No. rno.) lfl{'Jcflf~n adj. Taking up a residen,:e~,f~ 8Auuv. Enl amped . -(i.e. whose camp has taken up a location). -ai:ftlf. Near. ~l'lqftiiiif, Arrived, impending. " ~, Prosperous, a!lluent. (rt. '=Q'~. Prosper.) m:gfil', Now. -ai~;r, It is possible. (1t. ~, Be.) "' '8•~rar, Having thought possible, or surmised. ~'a n . Consenl, approval, opinion. ~: nom.. or 11cc. of ~l!_. A lake or pond . ~"{ijll:, On the margin of a lake. '8q, A serpent. Q, p1 ononiinal, All, every . llWGT, A I ways. Wi'@Tf~Ttlif, Possessing all 10rclly " ~~lien;~ ~fsfltllfl{ iud In an especial manner ', lflfq 8AHUV. With a serpent, infestecl by serpents. R~ inrl. gove•ni-ng the his. case, With, along with. ~"ii' o tlj. Innate, natural. -a~m ind. Quickly, precipitately. lfT'1lllf", I accomplish, kill. rt. 1'Tl.f ~lcl. 7wr. ~.!:_"iir 3d 11l. ll'Tl.fftfif~ jut. part. puss. lfTf\Jil JJas s . part. mf'i/1'9' n. Nearness, close attendance. '8Tl: m. Sum, amount. mi~ ind. With, along with; yoverning ins. case. '8Tlnjf'lfl~ A VYA. With a prostra tion of the eight members. See '-'iY!ji'Q'Tif. f.l~ m. A lion. !111' n. Pleasure, happiness. -----~~1qf~Tmllf TATP. gen. pl. Seated ~"comfortably, or at ease. See ~Q'r
PAGE 111
104 SANSKHIT FI HST LESSONS. m past. part. Endured, put up with (rt. ~). n. A place, spot, soil, dry or firm ground. ~lip! i1if. To stand. (rt. '1ft.) ~1;:r n . A place, station. A Slaying. ~T~flf, Thou shalt stand. 2d fut. 1,J lJT (Nu. 38). ft,qif pa.•s. part. f~i
PAGE 112
( 105 ) SUGGESTIONS IN REGARD TO AN ELEMENTARY COURSE OF SANSKRIT STUDY. THESE " First Lessons " having been gone through, and having given the student (it is to be hoped) a taste for this nohlest of lan guages, some suggestions in regard to his further prosecution of the study may not be unacceptable. If the student desires merely to pass the Civil Service examina tion, for India, his best plan is, of course, to adhere closely to what ever may be prescribed in the annually issued instructions of the Civil Service Commissioners for the time being. But, over and above this, some students at least, among those who seek an Indian career, may aspire to become more fully acquainted with that language and literature which, as being the pride of the people of India, may conceivably furnish the key to their hearts. The fol lowing suggestions apply to both of the supposed classes, to some extent,-but more especially to the latter. Instead of taking up Wilson's Grammar, and Johnson's Hitopa de1ia, after reading the prose extracts from the H,topadda included in this brochure, let the student, if only for a change of style, take up the " Story of Nala ", as edited by Professor Monier Williams, of Oxford. In this edition he will have the aid of the beautiful, and remarkably close, poetical version by Dean Milman,-'whil'h does not, however, give more than an allowable amount of aid to the beginner whose great aim is to acquire a copia verborurn. In the analytical vocabulary, arranged on a plan similar to that of the vocabulary in these "First Lessons", the references to grammatical rules presuppose the possession of Professor Williams's grammar. This grammar, though not so full as that of Wilson, is in several respects better calculated to win the attention of the student,especially the classical student. The study of it may advantageously precede that uf \Vilson's grammar, provided that the pupil destined for India shall guard against being led away by the author's inge nious, eloquent, and (-I had almost said-) insidious disparage uient of the native Hindti methods of tuition. On that point it
PAGE 113
106 SANSKUIT FIRST LESSONS. would not do to dwell here ;-I only beg the student at all events to suspend his judgment-till he can judge for himself. While going through the Nala, the student may profitably enaaae himself urJon the exercises (for tran,;lation into Sanskrit) b b contained in Professor Williams's little Sanskrit ''Manual". If studying by himself, he will here scarcely be able to dispense with the same author's "Dictionary, English and Sanskrit", Having finished the Nala, he may profitably take up Professor .T ohnson's complete edition of the Hitopadesa; studying at the same time Wilson's grammar, with the omission,in the first instance, of the po;tions the omission of which is noticed, in the latest instrnc tiuns issued by the Commissioners, as permissible or advisable. As Wilson's Sanskrit dictionary is unhappily out of print (-though that of Yates may form a meagre substitute-), the analytical vocabularies attached to the books just mentioned are a great boon to the student. The famous poem-the Meghaduta, or" Messenger Gkiud ",-has been edited with similar apparatus by Professor J uhnson; but the student (-unless he be fond of logic-) had better relegate this to a considerably later stage in his progress; for the compound words, thongh exquiRitely constructed, are of merciless length, and demand a tension of the mind which is not. pleasing to all~-nor at every time to any. The accompanying versified English version by Professor "Wilson is assuredly not more than a legitimate help to the student,-under which aspect alone, as mentioned in the preface, the ProfeRsor allowed his version to accompany the text, The " Selections from the 1VIahabharata ", by Professor Johnson, ( edited much like his Hitopadesa, yet with some further call --fur exertion on the pan of the student,) may profitably intervene between the reading of the Hitopadeia and the Megha-duta. Supposing us (--pupil and teacher-) to have got thus far, I have nothing that I now incline to suggest to the home students of Sanskrit, who will find indicated to them, in the catalogues of Bonn, Berlin, and St. Petersburgli,-or more compactly in that of Messrs. Williams and Norgate (London)-a considerable amount of pabu lum (-in the convenient shape of texts with Latin versions-) for the lover of this language. But if the Indian Civil servant wishes to gain the ear, and influence the mind, of' the leaders of Hindu thought-the leamed Brahmans-he must O'O throu(l'h a ,., 0
PAGE 114
SUGGESTIONS IN REGARD TO ELEMENTARY STUDY. 107 course of reading more dry, and to many minds ( -with whom I do not here quite sympathize-) more repulsive than that which has been hitherto spoken of. Grammar and metaphysics are the delight of the learned Hindu (-w horn all other Hindus look up to-), and if yon wish to reach his heart, you will do well to obtain some acquaintance with his philosophy and his grammar in the very shape in which he himself possesses them and treasures them. It is a great mistake to suppose that the marvellously condensed grammar of PA~INI (the chief of Sanskrit grammarians) is de signedly obscure. The charge of intentional obscurity might with equal reason be brought against the Binomial Theorem, which Newton assuredly never intended as .an enigma. To take a simpler illustration :-think how hard it is to carry in one's memory the arithm.P.tical rule for the extraction of the cube-root, or even of the square root. Yet Ji, ,w easy it is to remember the algebraical formula ( a + b) x ( a + b J = a 2 + 2 ab + b 8, from which the l'ule for the extraction of the square root may at any time be re-derived with perfect certainty. Analogously :-it is not very easy to remember, with full confidence, the specification in regard to the rule for the change of the dental n to the cerebral, after 7:i, r, or sh,-viz. (as Pro fessor Williams neatly puts it*) "even though oli k, 'lJ g, 'Q' p, or b, (or t.heir aspirates,)~ h, 11' y, 'q v, or 'I'm, intervene ":-and further, if ili!l'~cfilq[F'f~~Tirsf1t ,-like . '"' '"' th.e '' Propria qure maribus" of our fathers :-and such an appeal to the memoria technica decides the question ( -without book-) both for one's self and for others competent to have an opinion. It would be out of place here to go much farther into the question of the native Hindu system of grammar, but I feel bound to state, briefly, that the apparently prevalent notion in regard to the order of the studies of a young Bralima(,, is incorrect,-ancl mischievously * vVith intentioml omission, I conjecture, of the mention oft.he vowels and diphthongs,-as tending to cumber the rule with precautions and provisosnecessary in the case of the logical-minded Himlu, Lut not so indispensable iu tlic cuse of the looser, rough and ready, intellect of Eng1i:;hmen in geuero.l.
PAGE 115
108 SANSKRIT FIRST LESSONS. incorl'ect. I feel the more bound to mention this briefly (-resening a fullel' explanation for a possibly future occasion-) because I myself, in the Preface to the English version of the Laghu Kamnudi (published at Benares in 1849) re-echoed, in some measure, the erroneous tradition still too prevalent. \Veil then, it is true that a Hindu student requires at least ten years to become per fectly proficient throughout the whole range of the grammatical literature of the Sanskrit ;-but it is an erroneous inference that he studies nothing else during the ten years required for his becoming thus thoroughly proficient. Whilst he is committing to memory the condensed aphorisms of PA~INI, ( without explanation at the time,) he is not only reading quantities of poetry which his teacher explains to him in the vernacular, but he is learning paradigms of nouns and verbs,-" Rarnali, Ram au, Rama!t, iti pratltama; Rama111, Ramau, Raman, iti dwittya ;" and so on. He learns the Pa1_iiniyan grammar with the view of being able, as regards the Sanskrit grammar, to render at any time (-to himself in the first instance-) a reason for the faith that is in him. As I am here mainly con cerned about preventiug the student ( -intended for India-) from imbibing an unjustifiable and mischievous prejudice against the native Hindu expositions of grammar and philosophy, I dwell rather upon the imputations which have Leen cast upon these Hindu systems; than upon the merited commendation bestowed upon them by Professor Wilson, for example, who declared that the Panin, an grammar must be studied Ly every one who desired to learn Sanskrit" thoroughly and in earnest ",-and who added afterwards that the aphorisms of P .AJ:1INI (-usually spoken of, after Sir William Jones, as being "dark as the darkest oracle"-) are-since the issue of the ~1glish version of the Laqltu I( nurnudf.-" now quite clear". With regard to Hindi'.1 Philosophy, the learner may advisably, at first, view it, broadly, under three phascs,-viz. (I) The Philosophy of the Sage GAUTAllIA r termed the Nyaya Philosophy-), (2) that of the Sage lCAPILA (-termed the S11nkliya Philosophy-), and (3) that of the Sage R<\DAltAYA~A (-termed the Vedanta Philosophy). These systems are, all three, studied by Indian stndcnts,-generally in the order in which they have been just enume rntecl. 'l'honglt they differ noticeably from une another, yet they
PAGE 116
SUGGESTIONS IN REGARD TO ELEMENTARY STUDY. I09 nre held to be not irreconcileable, because, in seeking to give a comprehensive exposition of the totality of things, it is in their point of view that they differ most. They may be described (-as I have remarked elsewhere*-) as severally regarding the Universe as it stands in relation severally to Sensation, Emotion, and Intellection. The school of the Nyaya, founding on the fact that we have various, and seemingly heterogeneous, sensations, inquires what, and how many, are the channels through which such varied know ledge flows in. Finding that there are five very different channels, five different externals, adapted to these, are inferred. Hence the Indian theory of the ''. Five Elements ",-not of four as in Ancient Europe. The simplest introduction to the Nyaya system is the little manual called the Tarka Sangraha, the text of which, ,1ith an English translation and commentary, has been printed for the use of the Benares College. This manual includes, under one of its topics, an exposition of the Hindu terms of Logic, and of the systematic forms in which arguments are propounded or assailed by the learned of India. These deserve especial attention, on t.he part of the student who is going to India,-inasmuch as a familiarity with them will sa.-e a great deal of trouble, and of probably unfor tunate misunderstanding on both sides, when he enters on any serious reasoning with a Hindu philosopher. As the beginner (-for whom these. suggestions are intended-) has had perhaps enough (-or what he may, not improbably, con sider more than enough-) of these disquisitions, I here break off,only advising the student to suspend his judgment in regard to the Hindu systems till he shall have examined them. * Chmtianitv coutrasted with Hindu Philoso11hy, p. Jtvii. Printed by BALI.ANTY~F., HANSON & Co. EJinbur~h &> Loudon
|
|